Home

3G3PV User's Manual

1. Control L EI circuit mnm gm terminals O 29 EE 1 e 00000 a Charge indicator Main circuit terminals Ground terminal Fig 2 4 Terminal Arrangement 200 V 400 V Class Inverter for 22 kW Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed loop Connector Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table 2 1 to Table 2 3 Refer to users manual 1526 E1 D1 for wire sizes for Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units Table 2 1 200 V Class Wire Sizes F Recom Inverter Tightening Possible mended Model Terminal Symbol Torque Wire Sizes Wire Size Wire Type 3G3PV Nem mm2 awa mm AWG R LI S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 2 to 1 5 Ae R LI S L2 T L3 1 U TI V T2 W T3 1 2 to 1 5 R LI S L2 T L3 1 4 V T2 W T3 1 2 to 1 5 R LI S L2 T L3 1 4 U T1 V T2 W T3 12 to 1 5 R LI S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 2 to 1 5 R LI S L2 T L3 1 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 2 to 1 5 C BA e 5 5 10 R LI S L2 T L3 8to 14 E V T2 W T3 8 to
2. 0 4 kW 3G3PV A2004 E 0 75 kW 3G3PV A2007 E 1 5 kW 3G3PV A2015 E 2 2 kW 3G3PV A2022 E 3 7 kW 3G3PV A2037 E 5 5 kW 3G3PV A2055 E 7 5 kW 3G3PV A2075 E NEMA 1 type 11 kW 3G3PV A2110 E i 15 kW 3G3PV A2150 E 200 V class 18 5 kW 3G3PV A2185 E 22 kW 3G3PV A2220 E kW 3G3PV A2300 E 37 kW 3G3PV A2370 E 45 kW 3G3PV A2450 E 55 kW 3G3PV A2550 E 75 kW 3G3PV A2750 E 90 kW 3G3PV A2900 E 22 kW 3G3PV B2220 E 30 kW 3G3PV B2300 E Open Chassis type 37 kW 3G3PV B2370 E IP00 45 kW 3G3PV B2450 E 55 kW 3G3PV B2550 E 200 V class 75 kW 3G3PV B2750 E 90 kW 3G3PV B2900 E 110 kW 3G3PV B211K E SYSDRIVE PV Introduction Protective Structure Maximum Motor Capacity Basic Model Number 0 4 kW 3G3PV A4004 E 0 75 kW 3G3PV A4007 E 1 5 kW 3G3PV A4015 E 2 2 kW 3G3PV A4022 E 3 7kW 3G3PV A4037 E 4 0kW 3G3PV A4040 E 5 5 kW 3G3PV A4055 E 7 5 kW 3G3PV A4075 E IL kW 3G3PV A4110 E NEMA 1 type 15 KW 3G3PV A4150 E IP20 18 5 kW 3G3PV A4185 E 400 V class 22 kW 3G3PV A4220 E 30 kW 3G3PV A4300 E 37 kW 3G3PV A4370 E 45 kW 3G3PV A4450 E 55 kW 3G3PV A4550 E 75 kW 3G3PV A4750 E 90 kW 3G3PV A4900 E 110 kW 3G3PV A411K E 132 kW 3G3PV A413K E 160 kW 3G3PV A416K E 22 kW 3G3PV B4220 E 30 kW 3G3PV B4300 E 37 kW 3G3PV B4370 E Open Chassis type 45 kW 3G3PV B4450 E IPOO 55 kW 3G3PV B4550 E 75 kW 3
3. Fig 1 10 Removing the Terminal Cover Model 3G3PV A2055 E Shown Above B Inverters of 22 kW or More Loosen the screws on the left and right at the top of the terminal cover pull out the terminal cover in the direc tion of arrow 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2 Fig 1 11 Removing the Terminal Cover Model 3G3PV B2220 E Shown Above Attaching the Terminal Cover When wiring the terminal block has been completed attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal proce dure For Inverters with an output of 18 5 kW or less insert the tab on the top of the terminal cover into the groove on the Inverter and press in on the bottom of the terminal cover until it clicks into place 1 12 Removing Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover g Removing Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover Inverters of 18 5 kW or Less To attach optional cards or change the terminal card connector remove the Digital Operator and front cover in addition to the terminal cover Always remove the Digital Operator from the front cover before removing the terminal cover The removal and attachment procedures are given below E Removing the Digital Operator Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 1 to unlock the Digital Operator and lift the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the Digital Oper
4. 33 6 37 SHS6d Searcloc see facte Feci tapa 6 38 Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost 6 43 Restarting Operation After Transient Fault Auto Restart Function 6 43 Inverter Protection ii eere tee EE ieee bee Dr eet 6 45 Reducing Inverter Overheating Pre Alarm Warning Levels 6 45 Input Terminal Functions 6 46 Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control Circuit Terminals ssesssseseseeeeseeeee eene nennen nennen 6 46 Blocking Inverter Outputs Baseblock Commands s sscsssssesessesteseseseesesteseeseateseesees 6 46 Hold Analog Frequency Using User set Timing sssseeeeenne 6 47 Switching Operations between a Communications Option Card and Control Circuit Terminals eese nnnm nennen nennen 6 48 Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands FJOG RJOG etlam RR E f E ir a etd 6 48 Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the Inverter External Error Function Dee eere reed e ined 6 49 Monitor Parameters e eret iad ti vast iii Say 6 50 Using the Analog Monitor Parameters 6 50 Individual Functions
5. Cannot be output 5 5 38 Param eter Number Name LCD Display Output termi nal status Output Term Sts Description Shows output ON OFF status U11112 _ JT ET Multi function contact output 1 M1 M2 is ON L 1 Multi function contact output 2 M3 M4 is ON ___ Not used Always 0 Not used Always 0 1 Error output MA AB MO is ON Output Signal Level During Multi Function Analog Output Cannot be output Access Level RS 422A 485 Register Operation sta tus Int Ctl Sts 1 Inverter operating status 1 12 Zero speed everse Reset signal input Speed agree Inverter ready Minor fault Major fault Cannot be output Cumulative operation time Elapsed Time Monitors the total operating time of the Inverter The initial value and the operat ing time power ON time selection can be set in 02 07 and 02 08 Cannot be output Software No flash mem ory FLASH ID Manufacturer s ID number Cannot be output Terminal A1 input voltage Term A1 Level Monitors the input voltage of the voltage frequency reference An input of 10 V corresponds to 100 10 V 100 10 V 0 to 10 V possible Terminal A2 input voltage Term A2 Level Monitors the input voltage of the mul
6. Loaded operation Optimum adjustments and parameter settings Check record parameters 1 Set for 400 V Class Inverter for 75 kW or more Fig 4 1 Trial Operation Flowchart M Trial Operation Procedures The procedure for the trial operation is described in order in this section Application Confirmation First confirm the application before using the Inverter The unit is designed for using with Fan blower pump applications Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper 400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher Set the power supply voltage jumper after setting E1 01 Input Voltage Setting for 400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or higher Insert the jumper into the voltage connector nearest to the actual power supply voltage The jumper is factory set to 440 V when shipped If the power supply voltage is not 440 V use the following procedure to change the setting 1 Turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least 5 minutes 2 Confirm that the CHARGE indicator has gone out 3 Remove the terminal cover 4 Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied to the Inverter see Fig 4 2 5 Return the terminal cover to its original position 200 208 240 400 415V 460 220 230V 380 Ew Power tab Al y S Jumper factory set position 200 V class power su
7. Verify Mode Parameters changed from the default settings can be moni tored or set Autotuning Mode Automatically sets motor parameters if autotuning data from motor nameplate is input for measure the line to line resistance No Function Display Page U1 Status Monitor Parameters Monitor 5 37 U2 Fault Trace Fault Trace 5 40 U3 Fault History Fault History 5 42 A1 Initialize Mode Initialization 5 7 A2 User set parameters NOT USED b1 Operation Mode Selections Sequence 5 8 b2 DC Injection Braking DC Braking 5 9 b3 Speed Search Speed Search 5 10 b5 PI Control PI Control 5 11 b8 Energy Saving Energy Saving 5 12 C1 Acceleration Deceleration Accel Decel 5 13 2 S curve Acceleration Deceleration S curve Accel Decel 5 14 C4 Torque Compensation Torque Comp 5 14 C6 Carrier Frequency Carrier Freq 5 15 d1 Preset Reference Preset Reference 5 16 d2 Reference Limits Reference Limits 5 16 d3 Jump Frequencies Jump Frequencies 5 17 d6 Field Weakening Field Weakening 5 17 1 V f Pattern V f Pattern 5 18 E2 Motor Setup Motor Setup 5 19 F6 Communications Option Card CP 916 Setup 5 19 H1 Multi function Contact Inputs Digital Inputs 5 20 H2 Multi function Contact Outputs Digital Outputs 5 21 H3 Analog Inputs Analog Inputs 5 22 H4 Multi function Analog Outputs Analog Outputs 5 24 H5 RS 422A 485 Communications Serial Com Setup 5 25 L1
8. 200 V Class 400 V Class 4 DOP DOE RR Oy BY BYP DOF DOT GE GA EN 9 31 Wiring Example A wiring example for an Output Noise Filter is shown below Inverter Output Noise Filter MCCB 6 6MM lt T Y Dimensions The dimensions of an Output Noise Filter are given below Terminal Weight Diameter Diameter kg PLF310KA TE K5 5 M4 PLF320KA TE K5 5 M4 PLF350KA TE K22 M6 PLF310KB TE K5 5 M4 PLF320KB TE K5 5 M4 PLF335KB TE K5 5 M4 PLF345KB TE K22 M6 PLF375KB TE K22 M6 PLF3110KB TE K60 M8 9 32 Chapter 10 Appendix This chapter provides precautions for the Inverter motor and peripheral devices and also pro vides lists of parameters Inverter Application Precautions 10 2 Motor Application 10 5 User Parameletso 55e rate eee een 10 11 Revision History Mn 10 14 Nee Inverter Application Precautions This section provides precautions for selecting installing setting and handling Inverters Selection Observe the following precautions in selecting an Inv
9. qoe M M _ jm w Sog D1 5 w V 16 6 D zc D Grommet 200 V Class Inverters of 22 to 90 kW 200 V 400 V Class Inverters of 0 4 to 18 5 kW 400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 160 kW Fig 1 8 Exterior Diagrams of Enclosed Wall mounted Inverters Exterior and Mounting Dimensions Table 1 3 Inverter Dimensions mm and Masses kg Caloric Value W Open Chassis Enclosed Wall mounted NEMA1 IP20 Total Heat Exter Inter Gan W1 H1 x H D H1 H2 H3 Di tt prx nal nal tion Dimensions mm 300 285 200 V 3 phase 350 335 400 385 450 435 600 575 725 700 828 820 7 8 ble Use IPOO ty 14 39 53 17 41 58 36 48 84 59 56 115 80 68 148 70 91 161 127 82 209 193 114 307 252 158 410 326 172 498 426 208 634 466 259 725 678 317 995 635 784 360 1144 901 415 1316 1203 495 1698 1399 575 1974 1614 671 2285 2097 853 2950 2388 1002 3390 1325 279111147 3938 350 535 715 1100 1245
10. 1 2 SYSDRIVE PV Applications c cccccccscsssssessesssssesssssssseessssesseesecseesseseesecsecseesesesaesteaveareas 1 2 SYSDRIVE PV Models Dos ou need pU nua n 1 2 Confirmations upon Delivery ee mme 1 4 4 Checks sitet sie ee te ie t Sl nt itas 1 4 Nameplate Information essent treten tentent nennen 1 4 Component Names tenerent tente tette tnter nnns 1 6 Exterior and Mounting 1 8 Open Chassis Inverters IPOO ccscescsssssesessessescsseessscesssscssessessseesssnsscsseasesceseaeseeseeseees 1 8 Enclosed Wall mounted Inverters NEMA 1 1 8 Checking and Controlling the Installation 5 1 10 Installation 1 10 Controlling the Ambient Temperature 1 10 Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter 1 10 Installation Orientation and Space sss 1 11 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space 1 11 Removing and Attaching the Terminal 1 12 Removing the Terminal Cover cscccccsssscssessestesesssseesseseseesssssseeseasesceseaceseessaeseeseaceseeseas 1 12 Attaching the Terminal Cover 1 12 Removing Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover 1 13 Inverters of 18 5 kW or
11. esee 6 19 Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration Stall Prevention During Deceleration Function eene 6 21 Adjusting Frequency References 6 22 Adjusting Analog Frequency References ccscscsscssesessestescesssceseesssteseareseesesseseeseatesees 6 22 Operation Avoiding Resonance Jump Frequency 6 24 Speed Limit Frequency Reference Limit Function 6 26 Limiting Maximum Output Frequency 6 26 Limiting Minimum Frequency ccccsscecscescsseeseseesssssseesessesceseaeseessaseseessaeseessateseeseseesees 6 26 Improved Operating Efficiency seem m 6 27 Field weakening option tentent ntes 6 28 Hunting prevention Function 6 29 Xii Machine Protection reve eto eee 6 30 Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation 6 30 Detecting Motor TOrqUe tote tec 6 30 Motor Overload Protection ccccccccscsssssesessssessssesssssesesssseseesssesessssseesieseesssesteesseeecens 6 33 Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor 6 35 Continuing Operation 6 37 Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored
12. 9 18 Options and Peripheral Devices Dimensions The dimensions of a DC Reactor are given below Model Dimensions mm 3G3HV Dimensions D PUZDABO D D1 D2 5 4A8MH 18A3MH 36A1MH 72A0 5MH 90A0 4MH 3 2A28MH 5 7A11 MH 12A6 3MH 23A3 6MH 33A1 9MH 47A1 3MH 2 mounting holes App screws d2 2 mounting holes App screws d1 App screws d1 D Dimensions Diagram 1 Dimensions Diagram 2 B AC Reactor An AC Reactor is used to control harmonics generated by the Inverter or when the power supply capacity is greatly larger than the Inverter s capacity It is also used to increase the power factor Select the AC Reactor from the following table according to the motor capacity 3G31V PUZBABLI Models and Application The standard models of AC Reactors are listed in the following table Inverter AC Reactor Max Appli Voltage cable Motor Current Inductance Class Capacity ModelNo A mH kW 3G3IV PUZBAB2 5A4 2MH 3G3IV PUZBAB5A2 1MH 3G3IV PUZBAB10A1 1MH 3G3IV PUZBAB15A0 71MH 3G3IV PUZBAB20A0 53MH 3G3IV PUZBAB30A0 35MH 3G3IV PUZBAB40A0 265MH 200 V Class 3G3IV PUZBAB60A0 18MH 3G3IV PUZBAB80A0 13MH 3G3IV PUZBAB90A0 12MH 3G3IV PUZBAB120A0 00MH 3G3IV PUZBAB160A0 07MH 3G3IV PUZBAB200A0 05MH 3G3IV PUZBAB240A0 044MH 3G3IV PUZBAB280A0 038MH 3G3IV PUZBABI 3A18 0MH 3G3
13. External frequency reference 0to 10 V G Shield terminal PEE L 7H QV Speed setting power supply 15 V 20 mA Fig 2 15 Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table 2 7 Terminals FM AC AM SC AI A2 V V SN SC SP S1 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 MA MB MC M1 M2 M3 M4 R R S S IG A1 Master speed reference 0 to 10 V 20 A2 Master speed reference 4 to 20 mA 250 Q 0 to 10 V 20 Table 2 7 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes Termi nal Screws Phoenix type Tightening Torque Nem 0 5 to 0 6 Possible Wire Sizes mm AWG Single wire 0 14 to 2 5 Stranded wire 0 14 to 1 5 26 to 14 Recom mended Wire Size Wire Type mm AWG Shielded twisted pair wire Shielded polyethylene cov ered vinyl sheath cable KPEV S by Hitachi Electrical Wire or equivalent G 0 5 to 2 20 to 14 1 Use shielded twisted pair cables to input an external frequency reference 2 Refer to Table 2 3 Close loop Connector Sizes JIS C2805 200 V and 400 V class 3 We recommend using straight solderless terminal on signal lines to simplify wiring and improve reliability 2 22 For suitable closed loop crimp terminal sizes for the wires Wiring Control Circuit Terminals B Straight Solderless Terminals for Signal Lines Models and sizes of straight solderless terminal are shown in the
14. 5 36 7 Monitor Parameters iei et bte ee e eie eds 5 37 Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity 2 04 5 44 Parameter Settings by Function 6 1 Application and Overload 6 2 Select the Overload to Suit the Application c cceccssesssssessssesessestesceseatesceseseseessaneseeseaee 6 2 FErequency Reference nien Ed GREEN 6 4 Selecting the Frequency Reference Source 6 4 Using Multi Step Speed 6 6 Command entidad RR erede 6 8 Selecting the Run Command Source ccccccssssssssessescssesesessesescsscsesessesescesesescescsesneneacees 6 8 Stopping Methods 3 5 2 t pO dde AER PERDRE 6 10 Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop command is 6 10 Using the DC Injection Brake eene 6 13 Using Highslip Braking ssssennnte tnnt 6 14 Using an Emergency Stop nennen 6 16 Acceleration and Deceleration 6 17 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times sesssseeeenees 6 17 Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function
15. Dimensions Diagram 2 42 210 210 42 300 50 40 60 60 12 5 160 6 9 M12 E m rp Dimensions Diagram 4 Options and Peripheral Devices E Output Noise Filter An Output Noise Filter controls noise generated by the Inverter so it does not affect the surrounding equip ment It is connected to the motor output side 2000Y _ _manem saran tot Moe 3G3IV PLFO Tokin Models and Application The standard models of Output Noise Filters are listed in the following table Inverter Output Noise Filter Max Applicable Inverter Rated Motor Capacity Capacity No Qty Current Voltage Class 3G3IV PLE310KA 3G3IV PLE310KA 3G3IV PLE310KA 3G3IV PLE310KA 3G3IV PLF320KA 3G3IV PLF350KA 3G3IV PLF350KA 3G3IV PLF350KA 3G3IV PLF350KA 3G3IV PLF350KA 3G3IV PLF350KA 3G3IV PLF350KA 3G3IV PLF3110KB 3G3IV PLF3110KB 3G3IV PLF3110KB 3G3IV PLF3110KB 3G3IV PLF3110KB 3G3IV PLF3110KB 3G3IV PLF3 10KB 3G3IV PLF3 10KB 3G3IV PLF3 10KB 3G3IV PLF3 10KB 3G3IV PLF310KB 3G3IV PLF320KB 3G3IV PLF320KB 3G3IV PLF335KB 3G3IV PLFE335KB 3G3IV PLF345KB 3G3IV PLF375KB 3G3IV PLFE375KB 3G3IV PLE3110KB 3G3IV PLF3110KB 3G3IV PLE375KB 3G3IV PLF3110KB 3G3IV PLF3110KB 3G3IV PLF3110KB 3G3IV PLF3110KB 3G3IV PLF3110KB Connect the Filters in parallel when connecting more than one Filter and use a relay terminal block to balance the current
16. L LL Mounting hole 4 Dimensions Diagram 1 Dimensions Diagram 2 Mounting hole detail J 4 mounting bolts J 4 mounting bolts 9 2 1 E Input Noise Filters for EMC Directives 3G3RV PFID by Schaffner When conformance to the EMC Directives in the EC Directives is required always use one of these Filters The Filter is connected between the Inverter s power supply input terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 and the power supply There are holes for mounting the Noise Filters to Inverters on the top of the Noise Filters Use these holes to secure the Noise Filters to the Inverters Models and Application The standard models of Input Noise Filters for EMC Directives are listed in the following table Inverter Input Noise Filter for EMC Directives Max Applicable Rated Cur Model No Weight Dimensions Motor Capacity kW rent A d kg Diagram Voltage Class 3G3RV PFI3010 SE 3G3RV PFI3018 SE 3G3RV PFI2035 SE 3G3RV PFI2060 SE 3 phase 200 VAC 3G3RV PFI2100 SE 3G3RV PFI2130 SE 3G3RV PFI2160 SE 3G3RV PFI2200 SE 3G3RV PFI3010 SE 3G3RV PFI3018 SE 3G3RV PFI3035 SE 3 phase 400 VAC 3G3RV PFI3060 SE 3G3RV PFI 3070 SE 3G3RV PFI3130 SE 3G3RV PFI3170 SE 3G3RV PFI3200 SE Wiring Example A wiring example for an Input Noise Filter for EMC Directives is sho
17. 9 DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE DRIVE QUICK RDY VERIFY ATUNE Mode Selection Displays Monitor Displays Setting Displays ix Lit Flashing Not lit Fig 3 3 Mode Transitions Modes Drive Mode Drive mode is the mode in which the Inverter can be operated The following monitor displays are possible in drive mode The frequency reference output frequency output current and output voltage as well as fault information and the fault history When b1 01 Reference selection is set to 0 the frequency can be changed from the frequency setting dis play Use the Increment Decrement and Digit Selection RESET keys to change the frequency The user parameter will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting E Example Operations Key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure Mode Selection Display Monitor Constant Display Detailed Monitor Constant Monitor Display Frequency reference setting Drive Mode PE Frequency reference 29 display unit 01 03 nnn NNN monn ESC n os oo vi Output frequency nnn ESC Ivi Output current nnn eeu Ivi Monitor setting for 01 01 nn uuu Status Monitor Frequency reference ad 1 01 wi fi 680 0 Pee st EE 1 Mu 1 Fan operating time delude TL Ivi Al V A Error Trace Current eror y D
18. Chapter 7 Troubleshooting This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasure for the Inverter and motor prob lems and countermeasures Protective and Diagnostic Functions 7 2 TrOubleshoO l ng uen toii dn irent 7 12 7 2 Protective and Diagnostic Functions This section describes the alarm functions of the Inverter The alarm functions include fault detection alarm detection operation error detection and autotuning error detection Fault Detection When the Inverter detects a fault the fault contact output operates and the Inverter output is shut OFF causing the motor to coast to a stop The stopping method can be selected for some faults and the selected stopping method will be used with these faults A fault code is displayed on the Digital Operator When a fault has occurred refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the fault Use one of the following methods to reset the fault after restarting the Inverter Set a multi function contact input H1 01 to H1 05 to 14 Fault Reset and turn ON the error reset signal Press the RESET key on the Digital Operator Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again Display Table 7 1 Fault Displays and Processing Description Overcurrent The Inverter output current exceeded the overcurrent detection level Probable Causes A short circuit or ground fault occur
19. AS E amp T1 L31 Ir T1 L31 rey 200 42200 Cont 4200 42 200 Circuit Nd ey s I A 200 e 200 6 Note 1 Consult your OMRON representative before using 12 phase rectification Standard Connection Diagrams Standard Inverter connection diagrams are shown in Fig 2 5 These are the same for both 200 V Class and 400 V Class Inverters The connections depend on the Inverter capacity 3G3PV A2004 E to A2185 E A4004 E toA4185 E DC reactor optional OG A Unit optional Braking Unit Braking Resistor optional L1 m Lo VI2 WM 3 phase 200 MSO d VAC 400 VAC So geo Be sure to remove the short circuit bar before connecting the DC reactor 3G3PV A2370 E to A2900 E 3G3PV B2370 E to B211K E Braking Resistor 5 Unit optional d Braking Unit HR optional Q ii 22 c1 RAT L2 E e 52 L3 z 3 phase RI L11 200 VAC 1 3G3PV A2220 E A2300 E 4220 to A4550 E 3G3PV B2220 E B2300 E B4220 E to B4550 E t Braking Resistor Unit optional Braking Unit optional L1 L2 E L3 3 phase 200 VAC 400 VAC The DC reactor is built in 3G3PV A4750
20. 7 4 Display Table 7 1 Fault Displays and Processing Continued Description Motor Overheating Alarm The Inverter will stop or will continue to operate according to the setting of L1 03 Probable Causes The motor has overheated Corrective Actions Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration deceler ation and cycle times Check the V f characteristics Check the motor temperature input on terminals A1 and A2 Motor Overheating Fault The Inverter will stop according to the setting of L1 04 The motor has overheated Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration deceler ation and cycle times Check the V f characteristics Check the motor temperature input on terminals A1 and A2 Motor Overload The motor overload protection func tion has operated based on the internal electronic thermal value The load is too heavy The accelera tion time deceleration time and cycle time are too short Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration deceler ation and cycle times The V f characteristics voltage is too high or too low Check the V f characteristics The Motor Rated Current E2 01 is incorrect Check the Motor Rated Current E2 01 Inverter Overload The Inverter overload protection func tion has operated based on the internal electronic thermal value The load is too heavy The accelera t
21. If the motor response is low decrease the set value 6 27 Field weakening option The field weakening function is used to reduce the output voltage to the motor when the following conditions are matched The frequency reference is above the value set in 46 02 Speed agree is matched A digital input H1 01 to H1 05 is set to 63 In this case the output voltage is set to the value programmed in parameter d6 01 as a percentage of the corre sponding value for this frequency in the V f curve E Related parameters Name RS 422A S Setting Factory Access LCD Range Setting Level 485 Display Register Set the Inverter output voltage Field weaken when the field weakening com ing level oy si mand is input It is enabled when the field weak ening command is set for a multi function input Set the level as a percentage tak ing the voltage set in the V f pat tern as 100 Field Weak Lvl Field fre Set the lower limit in Hz of the quency frequency range where field con trol is valid The field weakening command is Field Weak valid only at frequencies above Freq this setting and only when the speed is in agreement with the current speed reference Terminal sel 3 S7 Multifunction Digital Inputs Advantage of the function Reducing the output voltage in quadratic loads is a simple way to save energy Having better speed and t
22. Reference 1 Description Sets the frequency reference in the units used in o1 03 Frequency reference 2 Reference 2 The frequency reference when multi step speed command 1 is ON for a multi function input Frequency reference 3 Reference 3 The frequency reference when multi step speed command 2 is ON for a multi function input Frequency reference 4 Reference 4 The frequency reference when multi step speed commands 1 and 2 are ON for multi function inputs Jog fre ence quency refer Jog Reference The frequency reference when the jog frequency reference selec tion FIOG command or RJOG command is ON Setting Range Factory Setting Access Level RS 422A 485 Register Note The unit is set in 01 03 frequency units of reference setting and monitor default 0 01 Hz BReference Limits d2 Name LCD Display Frequency reference upper limit Ref Upper Limit Description Set the output frequency upper limit as a percentage of the max output frequency Setting Range Factory Setting 100 096 Access Level RS 422A 485 Register Frequency reference lower limit Ref Lower Limit Sets the output frequency lower limit as a percentage of the maxi mum output frequency Master speed reference lower limit Ref1 Lower Limit Set the master speed reference lower limi
23. Same for Open Chassis and Enclosed Wall mounted Inverters 5 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site Install the Inverter in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions Installation Site Install the Inverter under the following conditions in a pollution degree 2 environment Table 1 4 Installation Site Ambient Operating Temperature Humidity Enclosed wall mounted 10 to 40 C 95 RH or less no condensation Open chassis 10 to 45 C 95 RH or less no condensation Protection covers are attached to the top and bottom of the Inverter Be sure to remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18 5 kW or less in a panel Observe the following precautions when mounting the Inverter Install the Inverter in a clean location which is free from oil mist and dust It can be installed in a totally enclosed panel that is completely shielded from floating dust When installing or operating the Inverter always take special care so that metal powder oil water or other foreign matter does not get into the Inverter Do not install the Inverter on combustible material such as wood Install the Inverter in a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials Install the Inverter in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids nstall the Inverter in a location without excessive osci
24. esses 8 4 Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card 8 6 SpecificatloTis anne adu Standard Inverter 9 2 Specifications by Model sess treten tette tatnen tate 9 2 Common Specifications cc doe o RE d te les 9 5 Specifications of Options and Peripheral 9 6 Options and Peripheral 9 7 Special Mounted Options tenete nennen 9 9 Separately Installed Options 9 10 Inverter application Precautionspendix 10 1 9 Selecliona tat ten t de ae dye ien iota installation e eeu ee e etd K Settings i cottidie i tte tasks vette s tti itcr be Handing EE E I D I E Motor Application Precautions sseenmnm Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor Using the Inverter for Special Motors c cccccccesessessessesessesceseasescesesssseeseareseesesteseeseaesees Power Transmission Mechanism Speed Reducers Belts and Chains 10 6 Wiririg Exambpl68S irre eee e receta eiit es Using a Braking Resistor Unit sse Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit Using a Braking Unit and Three Bra
25. B The concept of HSB If we want to stop very fast without using a braking resistor the only way is to reduce the amount of current regeneration This is done by reducing the motor efficiency Most of the energy will be dissipated as heat within the motor and just a little bit of energy is regenerated to the Inverter The way to reduce the motor efficiency is to force a high slip in the motor and keep it working in the non lin ear zone of its Torque slip curve Generator Mode d d wart Non linear zone power and Net power returned to torque are non proportional the inear area power an a p 0 same torque produces less power torque are proportional Low efficiency High efficiency Fig 6 17 Torque slip curve The normal behaviour is to work in the linear area with a small slip s lt lt 1 High Slip Braking Procedure 1 When HSB is applied suddenly you output frequency will decrease to half of the actual value That means that you are working at the point of Torque slip curve near S 0 5 This is the low efficiency area and the mechanical energy is dissipated mainly as thermal losse in the motor As the electrical regeneration is low the DC voltage does not increase The voltage applied to the motor is the corresponding voltage according the V f curve The voltage might be higher if the regenerated current is bigger than the value programmed in N3 02 As the mechanic
26. Locations close to power supplies Transportation Precautions E Transportation Precautions Do not hold by front cover or panel Instead hold by the cooling fins heat sink while transporting the product Doing so may result in injury Caution Do not pull on the cables Doing so may result in damge to the product or mal function Caution WARNING Use the eyebolts only for transport of the Inverter Using them to transport the Inverter and attached equipment may result in injury or malfunction Provide an appropriate stopping device on the machine side to secure safety A holding brake is not a stopping device for securing safety Not doing so may result in injury WARNING Provide an external emergency stopping device that allows an instantaneous stop of operation and power interruption Not doing so may result in injury Caution Be sure to install the product in the correct direction and provide specified clearances between the Inverter and control panel or with other devices to allow for proper cooling Not doing so may result in fire or malfunction Caution Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product Doing so may result in fire and malfunction Caution WARNING Do not apply any strong imact Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction Wiring must be performed only after turning OFF the power supply Not doing so may result in electrical s
27. Operates the Inverter externally Analog Operator small plastic Operator 3G3IV PJVOP95LI Allows frequency reference settings and ON OFF opera tion control to be performed by analog references from a remote location 50 m max Frequency counter specifications 60 120 Hz 90 180Hz Analog Operator Allows frequency reference settings and ON OFF opera E EN Standard steel 3G3IV PJVOP96O tion control to be performed by analog references from a reauency late Operator 73041 0906X L1 remote location 50 m max P P Frequency counter specifications 75 Hz 150 Hz 220 Hz Ground Digital Operator Connection Cable 1 m cable 3G3IV PCN126 3 m cable 3G3IV PCN326 E Extension cable to use a Digital Operator remotely Output line noise filter Cable length 1 mor3m Controls an Inverter system VS System Mod ule JGSM O A system controller that can be match to the automatic control system to produce an optimum system configura tion Provides Inverter momentary power loss recovery time Momentary Power Loss Recovery Unit 3G3IV PCNLI26 Handles momentary power losses for the control power supply for models 2 2 kW or less maintains power for 2 8 Sets monitors frequen cies and voltages exter nally Scaling Meter K3TJ V11O Measurs the output voltage externally and designed for use with a PWM meter Use a ground fault interrupter with a cu
28. Rated frequency Hz 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 VAC 50 60 Hz Allowable voltage fluctua 10 1596 tion Allowable frequency fluc tuation Power supply characteristics DC reactor Built in Measures for power supply harmonics 12 phase rec tification Possible Control characteristics Model Number 3G3PV B4220 B4300 B4370 B4450 B4550 B4750 B4900 411 B413K 416 Max applicable motor output kW Rated output capacity kVA Rated output current A 60 75 91 112 150 180 216 260 Max output voltage V 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 VAC Proportional to input voltage Max output frequency Hz 37 45 23 75 90 110 132 46 57 69 85 110 140 160 200 Output ratings 120 Hz max Max voltage V Rated frequency Hz 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 VAC 50 60 Hz Allowable voltage fluctua 10 15 tion Allowable frequency fluc tuation z E g E ex o Lj amp B T o o A DC reactor Built in Measures for power supply harmonics 12 phase rec isi 2 tification Possible Control characteristics The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole OMRON motor When selecting the actual motor and Inverter be sure that the Inverter s rated current is applicable for the motor s rated current 2
29. e 39 mSpeed Search Selection Set whether to enable or disable speed search at start and set the type of speed search estimated speed or cur rent detection using setting b3 01 To perform speed search when inputting the run command set b3 01 to 1 or 3 Search Name Search Method Table 6 1 Estimated Speed Estimates the motor speed when the search starts and accelerates and decelerates from the estimated speed to the set frequency You can also search including direction of motor rota tion Search Methods Current Detection Starts speed search from the frequency when the temporary power loss was detected or from the highest frequency and performs speed detection by watching the current level during the search External Speed Search Command External search command 1 and external search command 2 become the same operation estimating the motor speed and starting the search from the estimated speed External speed search command 1 Starts speed search from the maximum output frequency External speed search command 2 Starts speed search from the frequency refer ence set before the search command Application Precau tions Cannot be used multi motor drives motors two or more frames smaller than the Inverter capac ity E Estimated Speed Search The time chart for estimated speed searches is shown below Search at Startup The motor may accelerate suddenly with light loads
30. ing V f control HSB Dwel Effective only during deceleration Tim Stp for high slip braking High slip brak ing OL time Set the OL time when the output frequency does not change for some reason during deceleration HSB Ol Time for high slip braking Digital Operator Parameters i Monitor Select o1 Name RS 422A Nove Setting Factory Access LCD Description Range Setting Level Display Register Monitor selec Set the number of the 3rd monitor tion item to be displayed in the Drive User Monitor Mode U1 00 Sel Only LCD operator Monitor selec Sets the monitor item to be dis tion after power up Played when the power is turned on 1 Frequency reference PowerON 2 Output frequency Monitor 3 Output current 4 The monitor item set for 01 01 5 39 5 34 LCD Display Frequency units of refer ence setting and monitor Display Scal ing Description Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the frequency refer ence and frequency monitor 0 0 01 Hz units 1 0 0146 units Maximum out put frequency is 10096 2 to 39 r min units Sets the motor poles 40 to 39999 User desired display Set the desired values for setting and display for the max output frequency Set digit number excluding the decimal point Set the n
31. 4 2 Ne Cautions and warnings WARNING Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover terminal covers bottom cover Operator and optional items Not doing so may result in electrical shock WARNING Do not remove the front cover terminal covers bottom cover Operator or optional items while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in elec trical shock or damage to the product WARNING Do not operate the Operator or switches with wet hands Doing so may result in electrical shock WARNING Do not touch the Inverter terminals while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electrical shock WARNING Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm Doing so may result in injury WARNING Do not come close to the machine immediately after resetting momentary power interruption to avoid an unexpected restart if operation is set to be con tinued in the processing selection function after momentary power is reset Doing so may result in injury WARNING Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP Key on the Oper ator is valid only when function settings are performed Not doing so may result in injury WARNING Be sure to confirm that the RUN signal is turned OFF before tuning ON the power supply resetting the alarm or switching the LOCAL REMOTE selecto
32. 7 60 0 8 50 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 90 0 120 0 60 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 50 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 2 5 3 0 3 0 25 0 30 0 30 0 2 5 2 5 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 12 0 12 0 50 0 35 0 50 0 15 0 20 0 12 0 12 0 12 0 1 5 1 5 1 3 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 1 5 6 0 6 0 The settings shown for 200 class Inverters The values will double for 400 class Inverters 11 0 Factory Settings that Change with the Inverter Capacity 02 04 W200 V Class Inverters Param eter Name Factory Setting Number Inverter Capacity 02 04 kVA selection Energy saving coeffi i 288 20 223 70 cient Torque compensation primary delay time Carrier frequency selec tion Motor rated current 39 7 Motor line to line resis tance 0 230 Momentary power loss ridethru time 1 0 Min baseblock BB 0 8 time Voltage recovery time 0 3 Overheat pre alarm level 95 5 44 Parameter Tables Param eter Name Factory Setting Number Inverter Capacity 02 04 kVA selection
33. Description Select stopping method when stop com mand is sent 0 Deceleration to stop 1 Coast to stop 2 DC braking stop Stops faster than coast to stop without regenerative operation 3 Coast to stop with timer Run commands are ignored during deceleration time Setting Range Factory Setting Access Level Zero speed level DC injection braking start ing frequency DCInj Start Freq Set the frequency to start the DC injection braking in units of Hz when deceleration to stop is selected DC injection braking starts from E1 09 when b2 01 E1 09 DC injection braking cur rent DCInj Current Set the DC injection braking current as a percentage taking the Inverter rated current as 10096 e 10 DC injection braking time at stop DCInj Time Stop Set the DC injection braking time at stop Use when stopping if rotations continue due to momentum Set to 0 00 to disable DC injection braking time at stop 0 00 to 10 00 Stopping Methods g EDeceleration to Stop If the stop command is input i e the run command is turned OFF when b1 03 is set to 0 the motor deceler ates to a stop according to the deceleration time that has been set Factory setting C1 02 Deceleration Time 1 If the output frequency when decelerating to a stop falls below b2 01 the DC injection brake will be applied using the DC current set in b2 02 only for the time set i
34. Detecting Motor Torque If an excessive load is placed on the machinery overtorque or the load is suddenly lightened undertorque you can output an alarm signal to multi function output terminal M1 M2 or M3 M4 To use the overtorque undertorque detection function set B or 17 overtorque undertorque detection NO NC in one of the following parameters H2 01 and H2 02 multi function output terminals M1 M2 and M3 M4 function selection The overtorque undertorque detection level is the current level Inverter rated output current 100 6 30 B Related Parameters Nam Param ame eter 5 Description Number LCD Display Overtorque undertorque detection disabled Torque detection selec Overtorque detection only with speed agreement oper tion 1 ation continues after overtorque warning Overtorque detected continuously during operation operation continues after overtorque warning Overtorque detection only with speed agreement out put stopped upon detection protected operation Overtorque detected continuously during operation output stopped upon detection protected operation Undertorque detection only with speed agreement operation continues after overtorque warning Undertorque detected continuously during operation operation continues after overtorque warning Undertorque detection only with speed agreement out put stopped upon detection protected operation Undertorque detected cont
35. Inverter Input Noise Filter Max Applicable Motor Capacity Model No Qty Rated A kW Voltage Class 3G3IV PFN258L4207 3G3IV PEN258L5507 3G3IV PEN258L7534 3G3IV PEN258L 10035 3G3IV PFN258L13035 3G3IV PEN258L13035 200 V Class 3G3IV PFN258L18007 3G3IV PEN359P25099 3G3IV PEN359P25099 3G3IV PEN359P30099 3G3IV PEN359P25099 3G3IV PEN359P25099 3G3IV PEN359P30099 3G3IV PFN258L4207 3G3IV PEN258L5507 3G3IV PEN258L5507 3G3IV PEN258L7534 3G3IV PEN258L 10035 3G3IV PEN258L13035 400 V Class 3G3IV PEN258L13035 3G3IV PEN258L18007 3G3IV PEN359P25099 3G3IV PEN359P30099 3G3IV PEN359P30099 3G3IV PEN359P25099 3G3IV PEN359P25099 Wiring Example Wiring for an Input Noise Filter is the same as that for a Simple Input Noise Filter 9 29 9 30 Dimensions The dimensions of an Input Noise Filter are given below Model 3G3IV PFN258L4207 PFN258L5507 Dimensions Dimensions mm Diagram E PFN258L7534 PFN258L10035 PFN258L13035 PFN258L18007 PFN359L25099 PFN359L30099 SS SS a 18 e Ha A j 33 H Dimensions Diagram 3 J mounting screw
36. November 2001 Original production
37. Sets I control integral time in 1 second units I control is not performed when the setting is 0 0 Integral 1 limit PI I Limit Sets the I control limit as a per centage of the maximum output frequency 100 0 PI limit PI Limit Sets the limit after PI control as a percentage of the maximum out put frequency PIPI offset adjustment PI Offset Sets the offset after PI control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency PI primary delay time parameter PI Delay Time Sets the time parameter for low pass filter for PI control outputs in 1 units Usually not necessary to set Selection of PI feedback commandloss detection Fb los Det Sel 0 No detection of loss of PI feedback Detection of loss of PI feed back Operation continues during detection with the mal functioning contact not opera ting Detection of loss of PI feed back Coasts to stop during detec tion and fault contact operates PI feedback commandloss detection level Fb los Det Lvl Sets the PI feedback loss detec tion level as a percent units with the maximum output frequency at 100 PI feedback commandloss detection time Fb los Det Time Sets the PI feedback loss detec tion level in s units PI sleep func tion operation level PI Sleep Level Set the PI sleep function start level as a frequency PI sleep oper
38. The RUN Key indicator will flash and the STOP Key indicator will light during initial excitation of the dynamic brake The relationship between the indicators on the RUN and STOP Keys and the Inverter status is shown in the Fig 3 2 Inverter output frequency 2 NS STOP RUN STOP Frequency setting RUN e p STOP e Vibit 9 Blinking Not lit Fig 3 2 RUN and STOP Indicators Modes Modes This section describes the Inverter s modes and switching between modes Inverter Modes The Inverter s user parameters and monitoring functions are organized in groups called modes that make it easier to read and set user parameters The Inverter is equipped with 5 modes The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown in the Table 3 2 Drive mode Table 3 2 Modes Primary function s The Inverter can be run in this mode Use this mode when monitoring values such as frequency references or output cur rent displaying fault information or displaying the fault history Quick programming mode Use this mode to reference and set the minimum user parameters to operate the Inverter e g the operating environment of the Inverter and Digital Operator Advanced programming mode Use this mode to reference and set all user parameters Verify mode Use this mode to read set user parameters that have been changed fro
39. The time chart for when speed search at startup and speed search to multi function input terminals is shown below OFF Run command Output frequency ON Deceleration time set in b3 03 Set frequency Set using ra speed detected reference m b3 02 Output current 0 7 to 1 0 s gt gt Minimum seg time 12 03 x 0 7 If the stopping method is set to coast to stop and the run command turns ON ina Note Lower limit set using Speed Search Wait Time b3 05 short time the operation may be the same as the search in case 2 Fig 6 29 Speed Search at Startup Estimated Speed 6 40 Continuing Operation Speed Search after Short Baseblock during Power Loss Recovery etc Loss Time shorter than the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 AC power supply ON Set frequency Start using reference E Speed detected x Output current 10 ms 1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency immediately before the baseblock 2 After AC power supply recorvery motor waits for the Minimum baseblock time L2 03 x 0 75 1 minimum Speed Search Wait Time b3 05 Fig 6 30 Speed Search after Baseblock When Estimated Speed Loss Time Is Set in L2 03 Loss Time longer than the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 AC power supply ON OFF Start using speed detected 2 Set frequency reference Output frequency
40. errors Display Table 7 3 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect Settings Meaning Incorrect Inverter capacity setting Incorrect settings The Inverter capacity setting doesn t match the Unit Contact your OMRON repre sentative Parameter setting range error The Parameter setting is outside of the valid setting range Multi function input selection error Option Card selection error One of the following errors has been made in the multi function input H1 01 to H1 05 settings The same setting has been selected for two or more multi function inputs Speed Search 1 61 maximum output frequency and Speed Search 2 62 set fre quency were selected at the same time External Baseblock NO 8 and External Baseblock NC 9 were selected at the same time The Option Card was selected as the frequency reference source by setting b1 01 to 3 but an Option Card is not mounted or connected C option Multi function analog input selection error H3 09 B PI control selection error The following settings have been made at the same time b5 01 PI Control Mode Selection has been set to a value other than 0 b5 15 PI Sleep Function Operation Level has been set to a value other than 0 1 03 Stopping Method Selection has been set to 2 or 3 V f data setting error Parameters E1 04 E1 06 E1 07 and E1 09 do not satisfy the following conditions E1 04 FMAX 2 E1 06 FA
41. lay trip contact lg Rigsistor Unit 9 Nn TRX SA b Pm 1 A transformer is not required for 200 V class BU cum 2 Remove the short circuit bar normally connected from 1 and 2 when connecting a DC Reactor Optional Fault contacts 8 Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3 04 and using a Braking Resistor Unit The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed Fig 10 2 10 10 8 Using a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit This example shows wiring for a Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit 3G3PV A2220 E 3G3PV A2300 E 200 V class Inverters of 22 kW 30 kW A sequence is required to turn OFF the power supply for the thermal overload relay trip con tacts of the Braking Resistor Unit 3 phase power 200 to 230 V 50 60 8 Overload relay trip contact ofr sistor Unit Oe LL 2I aaa DC Reactor Braking Unit to improve Optional input power 1 T2 Braking Resistor Unit Optional Braking Resistor overheat S Lag Saal ing contacts Thermal overload relay Q o D L um Motor W T3 1 Ground to 1000 Ae Remove the short circuit bar normally connected from 1 and 2 when connecting a DC Reactor Optional Disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3 04 and using a Braking Resist
42. load resistance protection time for when the motor is hot started MOL Time Const Alarm opera Set H3 09 to E and select the tion selection s during motor OPeration when the input motor overheating temperature thermistor input exceeds the alarm detection level 1 17 V 0 Decelerate to stop Mtr OH Alarm 1 Coast to stop Sel 2 Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 3 Continue operation OH3 on the Operator flashes Motor over Set H3 09 to E and select the heating opera operation when the motor temper tion selection ature thermistor input exceeds the operation detection level 2 34 V Mtr OH Fault 0 Decelerate to stop Sel 1 Coast to stop 2 Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 Motor temper ature input fil Set H3 09 to E and set the primary ui ieee delay time parameter for motor temperature thermistor inputs in Mtr Temp Filter seconds 5 26 Parameter Tables EPower Loss Ridethrough L2 Nam Param ame eter d Description Number LCD Display RS 422A 485 Register Setting Factory Range Setting Momentary 0 Disabled main circuit under power loss i detection voltage UV detection Enabled Restarted when the power returns within the time for L2 02 When L2 02 is exceeded main circuit under PwrL Selec voltage detection tion Enabled while CPU is opera ting Resta
43. sssessssssseeseenneeeneeenneen nnne nnn 6 52 Using Pl Control ete ett nt 6 65 Energy Saving zs Rad eet eth oa e e a ER o oO US 6 72 Setting Motor Constant Parameters ccccccsscssesseseessssessesssescessaseseesssseseeseaceseeseaceseesees 6 73 Setting the V f Pattern sss tnter tenentes 6 74 Digital Operator Functions 6 80 Setting Digital Operator Functions 2 6 80 Copying Parameters ette dete et a E RE e ti s 6 82 Prohibiting Writing Parameters from the Digital 6 86 Setting a Password ect etre biennio 6 86 Troubleshooting 71 Protective and Diagnostic 7 2 Fault Detection c dee elie eee es ae ee d eed abun 7 2 Alarm Detection eet beer e e eet 7 7 Operation Errors 7 9 Errors During 7 10 Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function 7 11 Troubleshootlriqg eeui ior tti e E 7 12 10 Parameters Cannot Be Set entente teretes 7 12 If the Motor Does Not Operate cccccccccsescssssseesssescssssessesssces
44. 6 80 6 2 Nee Application and Overload Selections Select the Overload to Suit the Application Depending on the application the carrier frequency can be changed Pay attention to the following explana tions when changing the settings Related Parameters Name au E Changes etting actory During LCD Brille Range Setting Opera Level Display tion Carrier frequency selec Select carrier wave fixed pattern tion Select F to enable detailed settings using parame ters C6 03 to C6 05 1 Catrrier 2 kHz 2 Carrier 5 kHz 3 Carrier 8 0 kHz CarrierFreq Sel 4 Carrier 10 0 kHz 5 Carrier 12 5 kHz 6 Carrier 15 kHz 1 User set Carrier frequency upper Set upper and lower carrier frequency limits in limit kHz Set the carrier wave gain as shown below 15 0 kHz In vector control method the carrier frequency is CarrierFreq Max fixed according to C6 03 Carrier Frequency Upper Limit Carrier frequency Carrier frequency lower limit Output frequency x 15 0 kHz 7 C6 05 x K dl CarrierFreq Min Ki Output frequency E1 04 Maximum output frequency Carrier frequency pro portional gain K is the coefficient determined by the set value in C6 03 C6 03 10 0 kHz K 23 10 0 kHz gt C6 03 2 5 0 kHz K 2 5 0 kHz gt C6 03 K 2 CarrierFreq Gain 1 The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity 2 The setting ranges depe
45. 60 0 90 0 120 0 60 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 3 0 3 0 25 0 30 0 30 0 2 5 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 15 0 15 0 50 0 35 0 50 0 19 0 15 0 15 0 The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters The values will double for 400 V class Inverters 8200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 2 2 to 45 kW Factory Setting 50 0 60 0 72 0 50 0 6 60 0 7 60 0 8 50 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 90 0 120 0 60 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 200 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 50 0 50 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 60 0 2 5 3 0 3 0 25 0 30 0 30 0 2 5 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 14 0 14 0 50 0 35 0 50 0 18 0 14 0 14 0 1 5 L5 1 3 1 5 1 5 L5 1 5 15 7 0 7 0 9 0 The settings shown are for 200 V class Inverters The values will double for 400 V class Inverters 200 V Class Inverters of 55 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters of 55 to 300 kW Factory Setting 50 0 60 0 72 0 50 0 6 60 0
46. E1 07 FB 2 E1 09 FMIN Parameter setting error One of the following Parameter setting errors exists C6 05 Carrier Frequency Gain gt 6 the Carrier Frequency Lower Limit C6 04 gt the Carrier Frequency Gain C6 05 Upper lower limit error in C6 03 to 05 EEPROM write error A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM Try turning the power supply off and on again Try setting the Parameters again 7 10 Errors During Autotuning The errors that can occur during autotuning are given in the following table If an error is detected an error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator The error contact output and alarm output will not function Table 7 4 Errors During Autotuning Display Probable causes Corrective Actions Motor data error Alarm STOP key input Line to line resis tance error Current detection error V f settings exces sive Rated current setting alarm Displayed after autotuning has been completed There is an error in the data input for autotuning There is an error in the relationship between the motor output and the motor rated current A minor fault occurred during autotun ing The STOP Key was pressed to cancel autotuning Autotuning was not completed in the specified time The results of autotuning has exceeded the setting range for a user Parameter The current flow exceeded the motor rated current The de
47. H4 06 1 4 07 H4 08 H5 01 H5 02 H5 03 H5 04 H5 05 H5 06 Send wait time H5 07 L1 01 ump frequency 1 ump frequency 2 ump frequency 3 ump frequency width 1eld weakening level ARIRE S O KAP uala ale a 2 2 eo 5 5 Sc 8 5 5 5 2 8 EIS JBE ELI j Max voltage NI NI F Motor rated current NIJ Terminal Resistance Operation selection after communications error nput level of external error from Communications Option Card topping method for external error from Communications Option Card monitor unit selection erminal S3 function selection Terminal S4 function selection A Terminal S5 function selection Terminal S6 function selection Terminal S7 function selection Terminal M1 M2 function selection contact Terminal M3 M4 function selection contact Gain terminal A1 Bias terminal A1 Multi function analog input terminal A2 signal level selection Multi function analog input terminal A2 function selection Terminal A1 A2 switching Monitor selection terminal FM UJ Analog output 2 signal level selection Station address topping method after communication error 5154 Eg SEE lt lt lt lt lt S S S al a a A a S g als 8 2 2 a i Alo Ala alo lt olololololola amp 3 8 E ele Sg
48. Neme RS 422A 77 Setting Factory eter LCD Description Range 485 Number Display Register S curve characteris When the S curve characteristic time tic time at accelera iS set the accel decel times will tion start increase by only half of the S curve characteristic times at start and end SCrv Acc Run command Start Orr Output frequency C2 02 S curve ES characteris tic time at accelera tion end The S curve characteristic time at SCrv start and end of deceleration is fixed End to 0 2 sec and can not be changed B Torque Compensation C4 Bren EMO 5 422 are Setting Factory N Ser Lg Range Setting GEE umber Display Register Sets torque compensation gain as Torque com SIM NND pensation Usually setting is not necessary gain Adjust in the following circum stances When the cable is long increase the set value When the motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capac ity Max applicable motor capacity increase the set Torq Comp values Gain When the motor is oscillating decrease the set values Adjust the output current range at minimum speed rotation so that it does not exceed the Inverter rated output current Torque com pensation pri The torque compensation delay marydelay time is set in ms units time parame Usually setting is not necessary Adjust in the followi
49. The motor can overheat if the DC injection braking voltage or braking time is set to a large value Acceleration Deceleration Times The motor s acceleration and deceleration times are determined by the torque generated by the motor the load torque and the load s inertial moment GD 4 If the stall prevention functions are activated during accelera tion or deceleration increase the acceleration or deceleration time The stall prevention functions will increase the acceleration or deceleration time by the amount of time the stall prevention function is active To reduce the acceleration or deceleration times increase the capacity of the motor and Inverter Handling Observe the following precautions when wiring or performing maintenance for an Inverter mWiring Check The Inverter will be internally damaged if the power supply voltage is applied to output terminal U V or W Check wiring for any mistakes before supplying power Check all wiring and sequences carefully Magnetic Contactor Installation Do not start and stop operation frequently with a magnetic contactor installed on the power supply line Doing so can cause the Inverter to malfunction Do not turn the Inverter ON and OFF with a magnetic contactor more than one time every 30 minutes Maintenance and Inspections After turn OFF the main circuit power supply always confirm that the CHARGE indicator does not lit any more before performing maintenance
50. ation delay time PI Sleep Time Set the delay time until the PI sleep function starts in seconds 5 11 5 12 LCD Display Accel decel time for PI ref erence PI Acc Dec Time E Energy Saving 8 Param eter Number Name LCD Display Energy sav ing mode selection Energy Save Sel Description Set the accel decel time for PI reference in seconds Description Select whether to enable or dis able energy saving control 0 Disable 1 Enable Setting Range Setting Range Factory Setting Factory Setting Access Level Access Level RS 422A 485 Register RS 422A 485 Register Energy sav ing coefficient Energy Save COEF Set the motor rated capacity in E2 11 and adjust the value by 5 at a time until output power reaches a minimum value Power detec tion filter time parameter kW Filter Time Set the time parameter for output power detection Search opera tion voltage limiter Search V Limit Set the limit value of the voltage control range during search oper ation Set to 0 to disable the search operation 100 is the motor base voltage 1 The same capacity as the Inverter will be set by initializing the parameters 2 The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity Parameter Tables Autotuning Par
51. for all other Braking Units i e from the second Unit onwards Braking resistor overheating con Braking resistor overheating con Braking resistor overheatin tacts Thermal protector contacts tacts Thermal protector contacts tacts Thermal protector contacts Qs 1 2 1 2 Braking Braking Resistor Resistor Unit Unit B Oo Qo ere MASTER MASTER SLAVE SLAVE Cooling fin overheating con tacts thermostat contacts Fig 2 14 Connecting Braking Units in Parallel Breaking Unit Application Precautions Braking Unit 2 Cooling fin overheating con tacts thermostatic contacts Braking Unit 3 Cooling fin overheating con tacts thermostatic contacts When using a Braking Resistor Unit create a sequence to detect overheating of the braking resistor B 2 21 s iring Control Circuit Terminals Wire Sizes For remote operation using analog signals keep the control line length between the Analog Operator or oper ation signals and the Inverter to 50 m or less and separate the lines from high power lines main circuits or relay sequence circuits to reduce induction from peripheral devices When setting frequencies from an external frequency setter and not from a Digital Operator used shielded twisted pair wires and ground the shield to terminal E G as shown in the following diagram 2kQ 2 kQ
52. 0 4 0 1 0 x 2P 100 100 4 0 4 0 3 8 8 to 10 8 4 ees 30 to 60 50 3 to 4 0 1 0 0 5 to 5 5 1 25 20 to 10 16 80 to 125 80 x2P 3 0 to 250 3 0 x 2P 80 to 100 80 x 2P 3 0 to 4 0 3 0 x 2P Power cables 5 5 to 60 e g 600 V vinyl 8 8 to 10 8 10 to 2 0 power cables 100 to 200 100 3 0 to 400 3 0 0 5 to 5 5 125 20 to 10 16 RILI 512 713 1 SUAE LS 4007 225 10010150 100 x2P 4 0 to 300 4 0 x 2P 5 5 to 60 D3 8810108 oo E 6010150 60x2P 2 0 to 300 2 0 x 2P 0 5 to 5 5 125 20 to 10 16 200 x2P or50x4P S L2 T L3 61 31410392 20019325 5052 Nes 350 to 600 or 1 0 x 2P 150 x 2P 15045325 E3005 4B U T1 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 811 21 T1 L31 314 to 39 2 300 x 2P 300 t0 600 yy 4P U T1 V T2 W T3 RI L11 SI L21 TI L31 17 6 to 22 5 17 6 to 22 5 r ll A I2 1 3 to 1 4 R LI S L2 T L3 1 314 to 39 2 U T1 V T2 W T3 RI L11 SI L21 TI L31 17 6 to 22 5 17 6 to 22 5 rll A I2 1 3 to 1 4 U T1 V T2 W T3 RI L11 SI L21 TI L31 31 4 to 39 2 31 4 to 39 2 2 1 3 to 1 4 5 5 to 60 8 800108 1012 0 T50 150 x 2P 300 300 x 2P 0 5 to 5 5 125 20 to 10 16 31 4 to 39 2 1 3 to 1 4 The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75 C Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Table 2 2 400 V C
53. 01 02 to 4 INFO E Disabling the STOP Key If b1 02 Operation Method Selection is set to 1 2 or 3 the stop command from the STOP Key on the Digital Operator is an emergency stop command Set 02 02 to 0 to disable emergency stop commands from the STOP Key on the Digital Operator llDisabling the LOCAL REMOTE Key Set 02 01 to 0 to disable the LOCAL REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator If the key is disabled you cannot use it to switch over the frequency reference source or the RUN command source BInitializing Changed Parameter Values You can save to the Inverter parameter set values that you have changed as parameter initial values Change the set values from the Inverter factory settings and then set 02 03 to 1 Set A1 03 Initialize to 1110 to initialize the Inverter parameters using the user set initial values in memory To clear the user set initial values in memory set 02 03 to 2 ll Setting the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the Enter Key Use this function when inputting frequency references from the Digital Operator When 02 05 is set to 1 you can increment and decrement the frequency reference using the UP and DOWN keys without using the Enter key For example enter the Run command using a 0 Hz reference and then continuously press the UP key to incre ment the frequency reference by 0 01 Hz only for the first 0 5 s and then by 0 01 Hz every 80 ms for 3 s there after Press and hold down
54. 3G3RV PFI3018 E 3G3RV PFI3035 E 3G3RV PFI3060 E 3G3RV PFI3070 E 3G3RV PFI3 100 E 3G3RV PFI3130 E 3G3RV PFI3170 E 3G3RV PFI3200 E 9 25 Dimensions The dimensions of an Input Noise Filter by Rasmi for EMC Directives are given below Dimen Dimensions mm sions Diagram H X 3G3RV PFI3018 E 3G3RV PFI2035 E 3G3RV PFI2060 E 3G3RV PFI2100 E 3G3RV PFI2130 E 3G3RV PFI2160 E 3G3RV PFI2200 E 3G3RV PFI3010 E 3G3RV PFI3018 E 3G3RV PFI3035 E 3G3RV PFI3060 E 3G3RV PFI3070 E 3G3RV PFI3100 E 3G3RV PFI3130 E 3G3RV PFI3170 E 3G3RV PFI3200 E 9B bod 914 o line o XL o o Epl Ly poy Dimension diagram 1 Dimension diagram 2 9 26 Options and Peripheral Devices i Simple Input Noise Filter A Simple Input Noise Filter reduces noise coming into the inverter from the power supply line and to reduce noise flowing from the inverter into the power supply line Connect the Filter to the power supply input side 3G3EV PLNFDO Models and Application The standard models of Simple Input Noise Filters are listed in the following table Inverter Simple Input Noise Filter Max Applicable Rated Motor Capacity Model No Current kW A 3G3EV PLNFD2103DY 3G3EV PLNFD2103DY 3G3EV PLNFD2103DY 3G3EV PLNFD2153DY 3G
55. A 3 wire transformer is required on the power supply for 12 phase rectification Standard Inverter Specifications E Common Specifications Control characteristics The following specifications apply to both 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters Model Number 3G3PV Control method Table 9 3 Common Specifications Specification Sine wave PWM V f control Speed control range 1 40 Speed control accuracy 2 to 3 25 C 10 C Frequency accuracy tem perature characteristics Digital references 0 01 10 C to 40 C Analog references 0 1 25 C 10 C Frequency setting resolu tion Digital references 0 01 Hz Analog references 0 05 50 Hz 10 bit no sign Overload capacity and maximum current 120 of rated output current per minute Frequency setting signal 0 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA Acceleration Decelera tion time 0 0 to 6000 0 s 4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings Main control functions Restarting for momentary power loss speed searches overtorque detection 4 speed control maximum acceleration decelera tion time changes S curve acceleration 3 wire sequence autotuning cooling fan ON OFF control torque compensation jump frequencies upper and lower limits for frequency references DC braking for starting and stopping high slip braking PI control with sleep function energy saving co
56. Energy saving coeffi cient Torque compensation primary delay time 1000 1000 1000 Carrier frequency selec tion Motor rated current 105 0 160 0 190 0 260 0 260 0 260 0 Motor line to line resis tance 0 101 0 064 0 030 0 022 0 023 0 023 0 023 Momentary power loss ridethru time 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 Min baseblock BB 1 0 1 1 1 2 12 1 3 1 5 1 7 time Voltage recovery time 0 6 0 6 0 6 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Overheat pre alarm level 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2 0 seconds is required for 200 V class Inverters with outputs of 0 4 to 11 kW If C6 02 is set to 0 1 or F and the initial value of C6 03 and C6 04 is 2 0 kHz the initial settings for C6 02 are as follows 2 5 0 kHz 3 8 0 kHz 4 10 kHz 5 12 5 kHz and 6 15 kHz If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 7 5 kW or more the Inverter rated current will need to be reduced 400 V Class Inverters Param eter Name Factory Setting Number Inverter Capacity 3 7 4 0 02 04 kVA selection 24 25 Energy saving coeffi cient Torque compensation primary delay time Carrier frequency selec 447 40 313 60 245 80 189 50 140 88 200 200 200 200 200 m E 6 6 6 6 tion Motor rated current 1 00 1 60
57. Gain termi nal FM Terminal FM Gain Set the voltage level gain for multi function analog output 1 Set the number of multiples of 10 V to be output as the 100 output for the monitor items Voltage output from the terminals however have a 10 V max meter calibration function Gain termi nal AM Terminal AM Gain Set the voltage level gain for multi function analog output 2 Motor protec tion selection MOL Fault Select Set to enable or disable the motor overload protection function using the electronic thermal relay 0 Disabled 1 General purpose motor protection In some applications when the Inver ter power supply is turned off the thermal value is reset so even if this parameter is set to 1 protection may not be effective When several motors are connected to one Inverter set to 0 and ensure that each motor is equipped with a protec tion device Stall preven tion selection during decel eration StallP Decel Sel PD 5 0 Disabled Deceleration as set If deceleration time is too short a main circuit overvoltage may result Enabled Deceleration is stopped when the main circuit voltage exceeds the overvoltage level Deceleration restarts when voltage is returned Intelligent deceleration mode Deceleration rate is automatically adjusted so that in Inverter can decelerate in the shortest possible time Set deceleration ti
58. Multi function analog input terminal A2 signal level selec tion 0 0 to 10V input 2 4 to 20 mA 9 bit input Switch current and voltage input using the switch S1 on Term A2 Signal the control panel Multi function analog input i 3 terminal A2 function selection Select multi function analog input function for terminal Terminal A2 Sel AS Multi function analog input current terminal A2 input gain 0 to IF Set the reference capacity for each function during 10 V 20 mA input as a percentage 0 0 to Set the 100 content function selected using H3 09 to 1000 0 Terminal A2 Gain 100 100 0 Multi function analog input current terminal A2 input bias Set the reference capacity for each function during 0 V 4 mA input as a percentage Set the 100 content function selected using H3 09 to Terminal A2 Blas 100 100 0 to 100 0 E Adjusting Analog Frequency Reference Using Parameters The frequency reference is input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage and current If using frequency reference terminal A1 as an input terminal perform adjustments using parameters H3 02 and H3 03 If using multi function analog input terminal A2 as a frequency reference terminal perform adjustments using H3 10 and H3 11 Frequency reference Frequency reference peepee ee ee ose eae ee H3 02 H3 10 Terminal A1 Terminal A2 input input voltage voltage
59. d Buung 0 10 Sq suonipuoo eur Jepun 44O S Id NO S euis jooueo HO Id p Id Indu uonounj niniw 1 10 04 Fig 6 43 PI Control Block 19909 54514 ouenboeJ 1ndin Ly leuu 96601 X Xeuij g peg 10 1 jeddp Jenas dejs njnui ouenboj4 uondo EPI Control Block The following diagram shows the PI control block in the Inverter Individual Functions EPI Feedback Loss Detection When performing PI control be sure to use the PI feedback loss detection function If PI feedback is lost the Inverter output frequency may accelerate to the maximum output frequency When setting b5 12 to 1 and the status of the PI feedback value detection level in b5 13 is insufficient and continues for the time set in b5 14 a FbL PI feedback reference lost alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator and Inverter operation will continue When b5 12 is set to 2 a FbL PI feedback reference lost error alarm will be displayed on the Digital Opera tor the error contact will operate and Inverter operation will be stopped The time chart for PI feedback loss detection set b5 12 to 2 is shown below PI feedback value Loss detection level b5 13 Time No Fbl e gt 9 Fbl detection Loss detection time eer detection time b5 14 05 14 Fig
60. 0 4 0 A4900 E 81022 4900 P3 Reo he 8 to 4 En 50 to 100 50 c MI2 31410392 G15 4 0 1 0 5 to 5 5 125 200 200 400 400 o p M4 1 3 014 16 ERG 5010100 50 2 NM R LI S L2 T L3 C81 MI2 314to39 2 Power cables 1 0 to 4 0 1 0x 2P 600 V vinyl U T1 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 S1 L21 TI L33 MI2 31410392 201100 50x2P power cables i gt 1 0 to 4 0 1 0 x 2P AAMK E 8 to 60 BAHKE 3 M8 amp 80108 E p 60 to 150 600 co MI2 31410392 0 5 to 5 5 125 200 200 2400 5400 m M4 1 3 014 20 to 10 16 ie 80to 100 80x 2P S L2 TIL 1 MI2 3140392 3 9 to 4 0 3 0 x 2P 6010100 60x2P U T1 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 S1 L21 T1 L33 M12 31410392 ay QIOX 2P zu 8 to 60 A413K E 8 8 8 to 10 8 8 to 2 0 B413K E M12 3141039 1900190 100 i 4 0 to 300 4 0 0 510 5 5 125 200 200 400 400 ip M4 1 3 014 20 to 10 16 PES 10010200 100 x 2P 512 TIL 1 MI2 31410392 4019400 4 0 x 2P 8010200 80x2P U T1 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 S1 L21 TI L33 MI2 31410392 3945400 Q 0x 2P A4I16K E 80 to 60 416 3 Mer 79 50 to 150 50 2 1 3140392 1 0x2P 0 5 to 5 5 125 2200 5200 400 5400 M4 13to14 20 to 10 16 The wire thickness is set for copp
61. 0 Stopped Bit 1 Reverse operation 1 Reverse operation 0 Forward operation Bit 2 Inverter startup complete 1 Completed 2 Not completed Bit 3 Error 1 Error Bit 4 Data setting error 1 Error Bit 5 Multi function contact output 1 terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 6 Multi function contact output 2 terminal M3 M4 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 7 Not used Bits 8 to F Not used Error details Bit 0 Overcurrent OC Ground fault GF Bit 1 Main circuit overvoltage OV Bit 2 Inverter overload OL2 Bit 3 Inverter overheat OH1 OH2 Bit 4 Not used Bit 5 Fuse blown PUF Bit 6 PI feedback reference lost FbL Bit 7 External error EF EFO Bit 8 Hardware error CPF Bit 9 Motor overload OL1 or overtorque 1 OL3 detected Bit A Not used Bit B Main circuit undervoltage UV detected Bit C Main circuit undervoltage UV 1 control power supply error UV2 inrush preven tion circuit error UV3 power loss Bit D Missing output phase LF Bit E RS 422A 485 communications error CE Bit F Operator disconnected OPR 6 59 Register No Contents Data link status Bit 0 Writing data Bit 1 Not used Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors Bit 4 Data integrity error Bits 5 to F Not used Frequency ref er
62. 0 V E1 05 f 255 0 Max voltage V BASE i E1713 i Base frequency FA 0 0 to 50 0 Hz Base frequency Pho 120 0 2 Mid output frequency VMIN 0 0 to 255 0 Mid Frequency FMIN FA FMAX 1 E1 09 Ei 07 1 06 Ei 04 Frequency Hz 0 0 to 120 0 Mid output frequency voltage Mid Voltage A TE 7 a To set V f characteristics in straight line set the same Min output frequency values for E1 07 and E1 09 In this case the setting for FMIN E1 08 will be disregarded 0 0 to Min Frequency Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the fol 120 0 2 lowing manner Min output frequency E1 04 FMAX gt E1 06 FA 0 0 to voltage gt 1 07 FB gt E1 09 FMIN 255 0 Min Voltage Mid output frequency 2 0 0 to Mid Frequency B 120 0 Mid output frequency 0 0 to voltage 2 Set only to fine adjust V f for the output range Normally 255 0 Mid Voltage B this setting is not required Base voltage 0 0 to 255 0 Base Voltage 1 These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double 2 The contents of parameters El 11 and E1 12 are ignored when set to 0 00 3 1 13 is set to the same value as E1 05 by autotuning ll Setting Inverter Input Voltage Set the Inverter input voltage correctly in E1 01 to match the
63. 02 to C6 05 There may be resonance between a machine s characteristic frequency and the output fre quency of the Inverter To prevent this from occurring either use the jump frequency functions in parameters d3 01 to d3 04 or install rubber padding on the motor base to reduce oscillation Oscillation and hunting are occurring The gain adjustment may be insufficient Reset the gain to a more effective level by adjusting parameters C4 02 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time parameter and N1 02 Hunting Prevention Gain in order Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting BOscillation and hunting are occurring with PI control If there is oscillation or hunting during PI control check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P and I parameters Refer to page 6 196 If the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output is Stopped If the motor rotates even when the Inverter output is stopped the DC injection braking is insufficient If the motor continues operating at low speed without completely stopping and after a deceleration stop has been executed it means that the DC injection braking is not decelerating enough Adjust the DC injection braking as follows Increase the parameter b2 02 DC Injection Braking Current setting Increase the parameter b2 04 DC Injection Braking initial excitation Time at Stop setting 7 17 C If OV is Detected When a Fan is Started or Fan Stal
64. 22 21020 0 1 se BJ eS I UEM uj 4 p A e Operating time at error 22 iak a Ivi 1 Fault History 1st previous error 22 IR EF3 1123 45 i uU ot 1 ESC ow m fu 3 II TT A Fig 3 4 Operations in Drive Mode AL The display for the first monitor parameter frequency reference will be displayed when power is turned ON The monitor item displayed at startup can be set 01 02 Monitor Selection after Power Up Operation cannot be started from the mode selection display IMPORTANT 3 8 Quick Programming Mode In quick programming mode the parameters required for Inverter trial operation can be monitored and set parameters can be changed from the setting displays Use the Increment Decrement and Digit Selection RESET keys to change the frequency The user parameter will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting Refer to Chapter 5 Parameters for details on the parameters displayed in Quick Programming Mode E Example Operations Key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure Mode Selection Display Monitor display Setting Display Quick Programming Mode Reference selection EE J 1 5 eee QUICK RDY VERIFY A TUNE Operation Method selection b i fe 1 i Mia Stopping Method selectio
65. 3 10 26 5 Motor line to line resis tance 38 198 22 459 10 100 0 550 Momentary power loss ridethru time 0 1 0 1 0 2 f 2 0 time Voltage recovery time 0 3 0 3 0 3 0 3 Overheat pre alarm level 95 95 95 95 0 1 0 2 0 3 i 0 9 Param eter Name Factory Setting Number Inverter Capacity 45 55 02 04 kVA selection A Energy saving coeffi cient Torque compensation primary delay time Carrier frequency selec 103 58 67 20 46 20 41 22 36 23 33 18 200 1000 1000 1000 1000 1000 tion Motor rated current 32 9 52 3 130 0 156 0 190 0 223 0 Motor line to line resis tance Momentary power loss ridethru time Min basebl ck BB 1 0 11 13 15 1717 t me Voltage recovery time 0 6 0 6 7 1 0 1 0 1 0 1 0 Overheat pre alarm level 95 95 95 0 403 0 269 0 092 0 056 0 046 0 035 2 0 2 0 E 2 0 2 0 2 0 2 0 5 46 Parameter Tables Name Inverter Capacity kVA selection Energy saving coeffi cient Torque compensation primary delay time Carrier frequency selec tion Motor rated current 270 0 Motor line to line resis tance 0 029 Momentary power loss ridethru time Min baseblock BB time 2 0 1 8 Voltage recovery time 1 0 Overheat pre
66. 3 3 Setting User parameters in Advanced Programming Mode Digital Operator Display Description Power supply turned ON MENU Key pressed to enter drive mode DRIVE auek ADV VERIFY ATUNE MENU Key pressed to enter quick program ming mode eevee DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE MENU Key pressed to enter advanced pro gramming mode eoe RIFY ATU DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE ENTER pressed to access monitor display DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE Increment or Decrement Key pressed to dis play C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 ENTER Key pressed to access setting display The setting of C1 01 10 00 is displayed Digit Selection RESET Key pressed to move the flashing digit to the right Increment Key pressed to change set value to 20 00 s ENTER Key pressed to enter the set data END is displayed for 10 s and then the entered value is displayed for 0 5 s DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE The monitor display for C1 01 returns Modes Verify Mode Verify mode is used to display any parameters that have been changed from their default settings in a pro gramming mode or by autotuning None will be displayed if no settings have been changed Even in verify mode the same procedures can be used to change settings as they are used in the programming modes Use the Increment Decrement and Digit Selection RESET keys to change the frequency The user paramete
67. 4 7 Application Settings tentent nter 4 10 No load Operation eee ete el 4 10 Loaded Operatori E ede Rad ae HO RRA ees 4 11 Adjustment Suggestions ssssssssssssssseeseeeeeeen enne 4 13 TUN 5 1 Parameter Descriptions esses eene nennen 5 2 Description of Parameter Tables 5 2 Digital Operator Display Functions and Levels 5 3 Parameters Settable in Quick Programming 5 4 Parameter iren iter di 5 7 Sotup Settings a a aR 5 7 Application Parameters b nennen 5 8 Tuning Parameters C terere teret tete tnt tte tates tates 5 13 Reference Parameters d tentent tette tenes 5 16 Motor Constant Parameters E o c ccccccsscscscsssseseesssessesescssssescesssescsnssessesesceteseseenesssceecees 5 18 Option Parameters 5 19 Terminal Function Parameters 5 20 Protection Function Parameters L sse 5 26 N Special Adjustments netten nennen 5 32 Digital Operator Parameters 5 33 T Motor Autotuning 2
68. 485 communications 3 Option Card Stopping tion method selec Stopping Method Select stopping method when stop command is input 0 Ramp to stop 1 Coast to stop 2 DC braking stop Stops faster than coast to stop without regenerative operation 3 Coast to stop with timer Run com mands are disregarded during deceleration time Acceleration time 1 Accel Time 1 Set the acceleration time in seconds for the output frequency to climb from 096 to 100 Deceleration time 1 Decel Time 1 Set the deceleration time in seconds for the output frequency to fall from 10046 to 096 0 0 to 6000 0 10 0 s Carrier fre tion quency selec Carrier FreqSel Select carrier wave fixed pattern Select F to enable detailed settings using parameters C6 03 to C6 07 Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels Name S RS 422A Description Setting Factory Access 485 Reg LCD Display Range Setting Level ister Frequency Set the frequency reference in the unit reference 1 specified in 01 03 frequency units for reference setting and monitor default Reference 1 Hz Frequency reference 2 Frequency reference when multi step speed command 1 is ON for a multi function input unit Set in 01 03 Reference 2 Frequency reference Frequency reference when multi step speed command 2 is ON for a multi func
69. 6 44 Feedback Loss Detection Time Chart EPI Sleep The PI sleep function stops the Inverter when the PI target value falls below the sleep operation level b5 15 for the sleep operation time set in parameter b5 16 or longer The inverter operation will resume if the PI tar get value exceeds the sleep operation level for the time set in parameter b5 16 or longer When PI control is disabled the PI sleep function is also disabled When using the PI sleep function select decelerate to stop or coast to stop as the stopping method The PI sleep time chart is shown below PI target value Sleep operation level b5 15 Sleep operation Sleep operation delay time delay time Internal run command Operation Stopped Run command has been input Operation status output External run command Operating Fig 6 45 PI Sleep Time Chart 6 1 Energy saving To perform energy saving set b8 01 Energy Saving Mode Selection to 1 E Related parameters t Name Change param r LCD Displa Boiss cuu pus edd Number tion Energy saving mode selec tion Select whether to enable or disable energy saving control 0 Disable Energy Save Sel 1 Enable Energy saving coefficient Set the maximum motor efficiency value Set the motor rated capacity in E2 11 and adjust the value by Energy Save COEF 5 at a time until output power reaches a minimum value Power detection filter time param
70. DB Stop Su Lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 when an overcurrent OC occurs during stopping INFO il Coast to Stop with Timer If the stop command is input 1 the run command is turned OFF when b1 03 is set to 3 the Inverter output is interrupted to coast the motor to a stop After the stop command is input run commands are ignored until the time T has elapsed The time T depends upon the output frequency when the stop command is input and the deceleration time Operation wait time T Run command ON OFF ON OFF ON Deceleration time Output frequency e g C1 02 Inverter output voltage interrupted Minimum baseblock Operation wait time T time 12 03 Output frequency at stop command input Minimum output frequency 100 Maximum output frequency Fig 6 15 Coast to Stop with Timer e 12 Stopping Methods g Using the DC Injection Brake Set parameter b2 03 to apply DC injection to the motor before it starts to accelerate Applying DC injection at start will stop the motor before starting if it was coasting through inertia or wind mill effect Set b2 03 to 0 to disable the DC injection brake at start Set the DC injection brake current using b2 02 i Related Parameters Name Description Setting Factory Access LCD Display Range Setting Level DC injection braking current Set the DC Injection Braking Curre
71. DC injection braking cur rent DCInj Current Sets the DC injection brak ing current as a percentage of the Inverter rated current DC injection braking time at start DCInj Time Start Used to set the time to per form DC injection braking at start in units of 1 second Used to stop coasting motor and restart it When the set value is 0 DC injection braking at start is not per formed DC injection braking time at stop DCInj Time Stop Used to set the time to per form DC injection braking at stop in units of 1 second Used to prevent coasting after the stop command is input When the set value is 0 00 DC injection braking at stop is not performed 5 10 mSpeed Search b3 Param eter Number Name LCD Display Speed search selection current detection or speed calcu lation SPDSrch at Start Description Enables disables the speed search function for the RUN command and sets the speed search method 0 Disabled speed calculation 1 Enabled speed calculation 2 Disabled current detection 3 Enabled current detection Speed Calculation When the search is started the motor speed is calculated and acceleration deceleration is per formed from the calculated speed to the specified frequency motor direction is also sear ched Current Detection The speed search is started from the frequency when power was momentarily lost
72. E to A416K E 3G3PV B4750 E to B416K E Braking Resistor Unit optional 4 Braking Unit optional L1 L2 L3 E 3 phase 400 VAC dey A200 2 200 Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply for all Inverter models Fig 2 5 Main Circuit Terminal Connections 2 14 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Wiring the Main Circuits This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs i Wiring Main Circuit Inputs Observe the following precautions for the main circuit power supply input Installing a Molded case Circuit Breaker When connecting the power input terminals R L2 S L2 and T L3 and power supply via a molded case cir cuit breaker MCCB observe that the circuit breaker is suitable for the Inverter Choose an MCCB with a capacity of 1 5 to 2 times the Inverter s rated current For the MCCB s time characteristics be sure to consider the Inverter s overload protection one minute at 120 of the rated output current If the same MCCB is to be used for more than one Inverter or other devices set up a sequence that the powersupply will be turned OFF by a fault output as shown below Inverter MCCB Power supply 512 T L3 Fault out put NC For 400 V class Inverters connect a 400 200 V transformer Fig 2 6 MCCB Installation Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter Inverter outputs use high speed swi
73. Function This function allows the prohibition or jumping of certain frequencies within the Inverter s output fre quency range so that the motor can operate without resonant oscillations caused by some machine systems tis also used for deadband control B Related Parameters Name Parama E m Factory Access nes LCD Display Description Setting Level Number Jump frequency 1 Jump Freq 1 Set the frequency center value at which to prohibit set tings Set to 0 0 to disable the jump frequency Make sure the settings are as follows d3 01 gt 43 02 gt d3 0 0 to 03 120 0 Jump Freq 2 Operation within the jump frequency range is prohibited Changes during acceleration and deceleration are made gradually without performing jumps Jump frequency 2 Jump frequency 3 Jump Freq 3 Jump frequency width Set the jump frequency width in hertz The jump frequency range is as follows Jump frequency Jump Bandwith d3 04 Adjusting Frequency References The relationship between the output frequency and the jump frequency reference is as follows Output frequency Jump Bandwidth d3 04 reference ascending Jump Sump Bandwidth Bandwidth d3 04 d3 04 Jump frequency reference ump freq Jump freq Jump freq 3 d3 03 2 d3 02 1 d3 01 Fig 6 25 Jump Frequency Setting Precautions Set the jum
74. ON during baseblock Frequency reference selection ON Frequency reference from Operator Run command selection status ON Run command from Operator Overtorque undertorque detection 1 NO NO contact Overtorque undertorque detection at ON Loss of frequency reference Effective when 1 is set for L4 05 5 2 1 Setting Value Function Fault ON Digital Operator communications error fault other than CPF00 and CPFO1 has occurred Not used Set when the terminals are not used Minor fault ON Alarm displayed Fault reset command active Overtorque undertorque detection 1 NC NC Contact Torque detection at OFF Restart enabled ON Restart enabled Motor overload OLI including OH3 pre alarm ON 90 or more of the detection level Drive enabled E Analog Inputs H3 Name Param RS 422A eter LCD Description oe 485 Number Display 9 9 Register Gain termi nal A1 Sets the frequency when 10 V is input as a percentage of max 100 0 Terminal A1 Gain imum output frequency Bias Sets the frequency when 0 V is Terminal Al input as a percentage of the max Bias imum frequency Multifunction Limit negative frequency set analog input terminal A2 tings for gain and bias settings signal level to 0 selection 9 4 to 20 mA 9 bit input Switch current and voltage input using th
75. Operator s connector isn t connected properly Disconnect the Digital Operator and then connect it again The Inverter s control circuits are faulty Replace the Inverter CPU External RAM Fault Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuits were destroyed Replace the Inverter Digital Operator Communications Error 2 After communications were estab lished there was a communications error with the Digital Operator for more than 2 seconds The Digital Operator isn t connected properly Disconnect the Digital Operator and then connect it again The Inverter s control circuits are faulty Replace the Inverter 7 6 Display Table 7 1 Fault Displays and Processing Continued Description Baseblock circuit error Probable Causes Corrective Actions Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter EEPROM error Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter CPU internal A D converter error Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter CPU internal A D converter error Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter Option Card connection error The Option Card is not connected p
76. S S el elslelela 2151515 S S 5 5 5 518 2 2 E s ole 2 313 BIS EIN g gs vs wrsrs rs a 3 zs gt lo Q olo S EIS 2 8 z oj zi Seis 5 5 5 5 5 515 BB m camus ao amp 5 ci lt alol gle Sz 5 5 5 gt gt T gt gt O 0 0 0 0 90 A a lw 21 z z ele cig S a O S Er z lt 21 5 Sak 2 815165 2 5 Ale 09 1 15 S s 2 is s3 s S 5 ca o o 3 lt lt 0 IIR ERI 2 e lt ul lt lt O 5 Elo lt 2 2 1 a gt oje Si Si 5 Z gj da 09 da ole FA 5 p 55 8 8 e S gt 5 5 User Parameters Table 10 1 Parameters Continued Factory 1102 Motorproectiontime L103 Alarm operation selection during motor overeating ITO Motor overheating operation selection LTO5 Moortempeae 00 LTOD Momentary power loss detection 12 02 Momentary power loss ridethru time 0 15 o PLEO Voltage recovery ime 93 L2 05 Undervoltage detection level EXOT SaN prevention seleovon during dee 1 T305 Tulpmveninscectndwmgnummp f 1 0
77. are not separated from hazardous circuits by protective separation but only with basic insulation These circuits cannot be accessed and must not be interconnected with any circuits which are accessible unless they are isolated from accessible circuits by supplemental insulation w 1 Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below T a IMPORTANT SNSC SHA1 2 W AC V AC R R MA MB MC E G 51 S2 S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 FM AC AM IG S S M3 M4 M1 E G 2 The output current capacity of the V terminal is 20 mA 3 Disable the stall prevention during deceleration set parameter L3 04 to 0 when using a Braking Resis tor Unit If this user parameter is not changed to disable stall prevention the system may not stop within deceleration time 4 Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with sin gle circles 5 Sequence input signals S1 to S7 are labeled for sequence connections 0 V common and sinking mode for no voltage contacts or NPN transistors These are the default settings For PNP transistor sequence connections 24V common and sourcing mode or to provide a 24 V external power supply refer to Table 2 11 6 The master speed frequency reference can set to input either a voltage terminal A1 or current terminal A2 by changing the setting of parameter H3 13 The default setting is for a voltage reference input 7 The multi function analog output is a
78. cannot be Sel set Gain termi Sets the multi function analog nal FM output voltage level gain Sets whether the monitor item output will be output in multiples Terminal FM oy Gain The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V A meter calibra tion function is available Bias terminal Sets the multi function analog FM output 1 voltage level bias Sets output characteristic up down parallel movement as a per Terminal FM centage of 10 V Bias The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V A meter calibra tion function is available Monitor selec Sets the number of the monitor Hon Aes item to be output 01 00 from terminal AM Terminal AM 10 to 14 28 34 39 40 cannot be Sel set Gain termi Set the voltage level gain for nal AM multi function analog output 2 Set the number of multiples of 10 V to be output as the 10046 output for the monitor items The maxi mum output from the terminal is 10 V A meter calibration func tion is available Terminal AM Gain Bias terminal Sets the multi function analog AM output 2 voltage level bias Sets output characteristic up down parallel movement as a per Terminal AM centage of 10 V Bias The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V A meter calibra tion function is available Analog output Sets the signal output level for 1 signal level multi function output terminal selection FM AO Level
79. capacitors increasing the DC bus voltage If the regenerated energy is bigger than the Inverter losses 10 or less the DC bus will increase to a level where the braking resistor starts working If no braking resistor is installed the DC voltage will increase up to a level where the Inverter operation will be stopped and an overvoltage OV is shown E Related parameters Name RS 422A 485 Register Setting Factory Access LCD Description Range Setting Level Display High slip brak p ing decelera Sets the frequency width for tion frequency deceleration during high slip width braking in percent taking the HSB Decel Maximum Frequency E1 04 as Width 100 High slip brak EET ing current Sets the current limit for decelera limit tion during high slip braking in percent taking the motor rated HSB Current Current as 100 The resulting Ref limit must be 15046 of the Inverter rated current or less High slip brak ing stop dwell Sets the dwell time for the output time frequency for FMIN 1 5 Hz dur ing V f control HSB Dwel Effective only during deceleration Tim Stp for high slip braking High slip brak ing OL time Set the OL time when the output frequency does not change for some reason during deceleration HSB Ol Time for high slip braking Terminal sel 53 57 Multifunction Digital Inputs Terminal sel 53 57 Stopping Methods
80. case it the minimum value per Inverter 9 14 Dimensions The dimensions of a Braking Unit are given below Up Mounting direction T Four M4 ia mounting holes 66 5 7 S 30 min 30 min 138 5 gt E S Three wire pull out holes with 22mm dia rubber bushings B Braking Resistor Unit Options and Peripheral Devices A Braking Resistor Unit is used to absorb the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to reduce deceleration time use rate 10 ED A 10 ED means that the 10 of the operating cycle time can be used to control braking deceleration time Models and Application The standard models of Braking Resistor Units are listed below Inverter Braking Resistor Unit Voltage Class 200 V Class Applicable Motor Capacity Model No 3G3IV PLKEB20P7 Resistor Specifications per Unit 70 W 200 Q Qty Used Approx Braking Torque 3G3IV PLKEB20P7 70 W 200 Q 3G3IV PLKEB21P5 260 W 100 Q 3G3IV PLKEB22P2 260 W 100 Q 3G3IV PLKEB23P7 390 W 40 Q 3G3IV PLKEB25P5 520 W 30 Q 3G3IV PLKEB27P5 780 W 20 Q 3G3IV PLKEB2011 2400 W 13 6 Q 3G3IV PLKEB2015 3000 W 10 Q 3G3IV PLKEB2015 3000 W 10 Q 3G3IV PLKEB2022 4800 W 6 8 3G3IV PLKEB2015 3000 W 10 Q 3G3IV PLKEB2015 3000 W 10 Q 3G3IV P
81. dedicated meter output for an analog frequency meter current meter voltmeter wattmeter etc Do not use this output for feedback control or for any other control pur pose 8 DC reactors to improve the input power factor built into 200 V Class Inverters for 22 to 110 kW and 400 V Class Inverters for 22 to 160 kW A DC reactor is thus an option only for Inverters for 18 5 kW or less Remove the short bar when connecting a DC reactor to Inverters for 18 5 kW or less Set parameter L8 01 to 1 when using an optional braking resistor unit and braking unit When using this a shutoff sequence for the power supply must be made using a thermal relay trip 2 6 Ne Terminal Block Configuration The terminal arrangement for 200 V Class Inverters are shown in Fig 2 3 and Fig 2 4 SN SC SP A1 A2 V AC V R R ES sis I wA we ss s4 ss s sz P 5 5 llle Ec I Control circuit terminals 2 2000000000000 ooooo oeoooooooooooQ agoa oy y oe Main circuit terminals Charge indicator Ground terminal
82. function analog output current monitor 5 V Inverter s rated cur rent Multi function analog monitor 2 0 to 10 V max 5 2 mA max communications input communications output For 2 wire RS 485 short R and S as well as R and S Differential input PHC isolation Differential input PHC isolation Signal common 1 The default settings are given for terminals S3 to S7 For a 3 wire sequence the default settings are a 3 wire sequence for S5 multi step speed setting 1 for S6 and multi step speed setting 2 for S7 2 24 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals BDIP Switch S1 and Shunt Connector CN15 The DIP switch S1 and shunt connector CN 15 of the optional terminal board 3G3PV PETC618120 are described in this section S1 GEFT Terminating resistance E Analog input A2 switch Factory settings l Analog output switch eeg Voltage output l SiS Current output l ee ee c EN QI wt AX ica I m la SS E jo 1 S1 _ LA ER CJileooooooooooo0 0202000 B oooooooooooQoQ 20000 1 Note Refer to Table 2 10 for S1 functions Note CN15 is not available at the standard terminal board An optional terminal board with CN15 Shunt Connector is available The standard setting is voltage output Fig 2 18 DIP Swit
83. function selection to 12 FJOG command or 13 RJOG command B Related Parameters Name Param LLL j ha Setting Factory SE LCD Display Doscunuon Range Setting Number Jog frequency reference The frequency reference when the jog frequency reference selection command RJOG command is ON 120 00 Jog Reference Multi Function Contact Inputs H1 01 to H1 05 Set FJOG command ON Forward run at jog frequency 41 17 RJOG command ON Reverse run at jog frequency d1 17 Input Terminal Functions E E A pplication Precautions Jog frequencies using FJOG and RJOG commands are given priority over other frequency references When both FJOG command and RJOG commands are ON for 500 ms or longer at the same time the Inverter stops according to the setting in b1 03 stopping method selection Stopping the Inverter by Notifying Programming Device Errors to the Inverter External Error Function The external error function performs the error contact output and stops the Inverter operation if the Inverter peripheral devices break down or an error occurs The digital operator will display EFx External error input terminal Sx The x in EFx shows the terminal number of the terminal that input the external error signal For example if an external error signal is input to terminal S3 EF3 will be displayed To use the external error function set one of the values 20 t
84. ground of 100 Ohm or less for 200 V AC class or 10 Ohm or less for the 400 V class Not connecting to a proper ground may result in electrical shock or fire Caution Install external circuit breakers and take other safety measures against short circuiting in external wiring Not doing so may result in fire Caution Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as the AC power supply voltage An incorrect power supply may result in fire injury or malfunction Connect the Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor Unit as specified in the man ual Not doing so may result in fire Be sure to wire correctly and securely Not doing so may result in injury or damage to the product Caution Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block Not doing so may result in fire injury or damage to the product Caution Do not connect an AC power source to the U V W output Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction ZN A ZN ZN ZN ZN ZN ZN A A Caution Do not connect a load to the machine during auto tuning Not doing so may result in equipment damage Connections to Peripheral Devices E Connections to Peripheral Devices Examples of connections between the Inverter and typical peripheral devices are shown in Fig 2 1 Power supply Molded case 4 y circuit breaker or ground fault 5 interrupter Magnetic con tactor MC AC reactor fo
85. it 1 Confirm that the Digital Operator is not mounted on the front cover Contact faults can occur if the cover is attached while the Digital Operator is mounted to it 2 Insert the tab on the top of the front cover into the slot on the Inverter and press in on the cover until it clicks into place on the Inverter E Attaching the Digital Operator Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18 5 kW or less 1 16 Chapter 2 Wiring This chapter describes wiring terminals main circuit terminal connections main circuit termi nal wiring specifications control circuit terminals and control circuit wiring specifications hnnc 2 2 Connections to Peripheral 2 3 Connection te eigiel bees 2 4 Terminal Block Configuration esee 2 6 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals esses 2 7 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals eese 2 22 Wirin Check ettet ER ettet es 2 29 2 2 WARNING Wiring must be performed only after turning OFF the power supply Not doing so may result in electrical shock WARNING WARNING Wiring must be performed by authorized personnel Not doing so may result in electrical shock Be sure to confirm operation only after wiring the emergency stop circuit Not doing so may result in injury Required Always connect the ground terminals to a
86. of NEMA 1 in the USA Top protective cover Fig 1 3 has to be installed to conform with IEC IP20 and NEMA Type 1 requirements Component Names B Inverter Appearance The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in Fig 1 3 The Inverter with the ter 1 6 minal cover removed is shown in Fig 1 4 Top protective cover Part of Enclosed Wall mounted Type IEC IP20 NEMA Type 1 Front cover Mounting hole eDis case Digital Operator Terminai cover Bottom protective cover Fig 1 3 Inverter Appearance 18 5 kW or Less EL Isis Ei 81 82 53 84 35 86 87 FM C AM ZEN Q A 2220020022000 20000 KAA EIOICIOICICIOISIOIOIOT a a GE ILS S1 82 B1 B2 Urt Ground terminal Fig 1 4 Terminal Arrangement 18 5 kW or Less ENS SPAT aa ac e ajae I Control circuit terminals Main circuit terminals Charge indicator Confirmations upon Delivery B Inverters of 22 kW or More The external appearance and component names of the Inverter are shown in
87. operating faults Process cable ends as shown in Fig 2 20 Connect the shield wire to terminal E G Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment Shield sheath Armor Do not connect here Connect to shield sheath ter minal at Inverter terminal Insulate with tape G Fig 2 20 Processing the Ends of Twisted pair Cables 2 28 Wiring Check Wiring Check Checks Check all wiring after wiring has been completed Do not perform a buzzer check on control circuits Perform the following checks on the wiring Is all wiring correct Have any wire clippings screws or other foreign material been left Are all screws tight Are any wire ends contacting other terminals 2 29 Installing and Wiring Option Cards Option Card Models and Specifications One Option Card can be mounted in the Inverter as shown in Fig 2 21 Table 2 12 lists the type of Option Cards and their specifications Table 2 12 EE d Card and their Specifications Device Net Communications 3Garv Defi t ti t DDRTLSIN eficient communications suppor Installation Before mounting an Option Card remove the terminal cover and be sure that the charge indicator inside the Inverter is not lit After confirming that the charge indicator is not lit remove the Digital Operator and front cover and then mount the Option Card Refer to documentation provided
88. power supply voltage This set value will be the standard value for the protection function and similar functions overvoltage level stall trip ll Setting V f Pattern Set the V f pattern in E1 03 There are two methods of setting the V f pattern Select one of the 14 pattern types set value 0 to D that have been set beforehand or set a user defined V f pattern set value F The factory setting for E1 03 is F The contents of E1 03 when factory set to F are the same as when E1 03 is set to 0 To select one of the existing patterns refer to the following table Characteristic Parameter Torque Characteristic Application This pattern is used in general applications Used when the load torque is fixed regard less of rotation speed for linear transport systems Individual Functions Specifications 50 Hz specifications 60 Hz specifications 60 Hz specifications voltage saturation at 50 Hz 72 Hz specifications voltage saturation at 60 Hz Variable torque characteristic This pattern is used for loads with torque proportional to two or three times the rota tion speed such as fans and pumps 50 Hz specifications X 3 decrement 50 Hz specifications X 2 decrement 60 Hz specifications X 3 decrement 60 Hz specifications X 2 decrement High Startup Torque See Note Select the high startup torque V f pattern only in the following cases The wiring distance betwe
89. serial communications with one slave at a time Consequently you must set the address of each slave before so that the master can perform serial communications using that address Slaves receiv ing commands from the master perform the specified function and send a response to the master SYSMAC series PLC L Inverter Inverter Inverter Fig 6 38 Example of Connections between PLC and Inverter il Communications Specifications The RS 422A 485 communications specifications are shown in the following table Item Specifications Interface RS 422 RS 485 Communications Cycle Asynchronous Start stop synchronization Baud rate Select from 1 200 2 400 4 800 9 600 and 19 200 bps Data length 8 bits fixed Communications Parameters Parity Select from even odd or none Stop bits 1 bit selected Communications Protocol RS 422A 485 Number of Connectable Units 31 units max B Communications Connection Terminal RS 422A 485 communications use the following terminals S S R and R Set the terminating resistance by turning ON pin 1 of switch S1 for the last Inverter only as seen from the PLC S S R or Foon Y Terminating OFF G A or RS 485 1c b ONG resistance HN 2 Switch 1 d lt Terminating resistance 1 2W 110 Ohms Fig 6 39 Communications Connection Terminal 6 52 Individual Fun
90. sets whether the Enter Key is necessary 0 Enter Key needed 1 Enter Key not needed When set to 1 the Inverter accepts the frequency reference without Enter Key operation Cumulative operation time setting Elapsed Time Set Sets the cumulative operation time in hour units Operation time is calculated from the set values Fan operation time set ting Fan ON Time Set Set the initial value of the fan operation time using hour units The operation time accumulates from the set value Digital Operator Functions w E Changing Frequency Reference and Display Units Set the Digital Operator frequency reference and display units using parameter 01 03 You can change the units for the following parameters using 01 03 U1 01 Frequency Reference U1 02 Output Frequency U1 05 Motor Speed U1 20 Output Frequency after Soft Start 11 01 to 41 04 and 41 17 Frequency references iS witching Monitors when the Power Supply Is ON Using parameter 01 02 selects the monitor item 01 00 status monitor that is to be displayed on the Digi tal Operator when the power supply is turned ON For monitors that can be displayed refer to 01 00 in Chapter 5 Parameters Setting Precautions If selecting monitor parameters other than U1 01 Frequency Reference U1 02 Output Frequency and U1 03 Output Current first select the monitor items to be displayed in o1 01 monitor selection and then set
91. smoothly from that speed It is also activated after momentary power loss detection when L2 01 is set to Access Level Speed search operating current current detec tion SpdSrch Current Sets the speed search operation current as a percentage taking the Inverter rated current as 100 Not usually necessary to set When restarting is not possible with the factory settings reduce the value 12096 Speed search decelera tion time current detec tion SpdSrch Dec Time Sets the output frequency deceleration time during speed search Set the time for deceleration from the maximum output fre quency to the minimum output frequency Speed search wait time current detection or Speed calculation Search Delay Sets the contactor operating delay time when there is a contac tor on the output side of the Inverter When a speed search is performed after recovering from a momentary power loss the search operation is delayed by the time set here Min baseblock time PwrL Baseblock t Sets the Inverter s minimum baseblock time when the inverter is restarted after power loss ridethrough Sets the time to approximately 0 7 times the motor secondary circuit time parameter If an overcurrent or undercurrent occurs when starting a speed search or DC injection braking increase the set values 0 1 to 5 0 Voltage recovery time PwrL V f Ramp t Sets the time required to return the Inve
92. the Inverter if the fault continues to occur Main Circuit Voltage Fault The main circuit DC voltage oscillates unusually not when regenerating An open phase occurred in the input power supply A momentary power loss occurred The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are too large The voltage balance between phases is bad Reset the fault after correcting its cause Output Open phase An open phase occurred at the Inverter output There is a broken wire in the output cable There is a broken wire in the motor winding The output terminals are loose Reset the fault after correcting its cause The motor being used has a capacity less than 596 of the Inverter s maxi mum motor capacity Check the motor and Inverter capacity Cooling Fin Overheating The temperature of the Inverter s cool ing fin exceeded the setting in L8 02 or 105 C OH The temperature exceeded the setting in L8 02 Stopping method can be changed by L8 03 OH1 The temperature exceeded 100 C Stopping method Coast to stop The ambient temperature is too high Install a cooling unit There is a heat source nearby Remove the heat source The Inverter s cooling fan has stopped Inverter s Cooling Fan Stopped The Inverter s cooling fan has stopped Replace the cooling fan Contact our sales representative
93. the UP key for 3 s minimum to reach the maximum output frequency 10 s after that The frequency reference that has been set will be stored in memory 5 s after the UP or DOWN keys are released e 81 il Clearing Cumulative Operation Time Set the cumulative operation time initial value in time units in parameter 02 07 Set 02 07 to 0 to clear U1 13 inverter Operating Time i Clearing Inverter Cooling Fan Operation Time Set the fan operation time initial value in time units in parameter 02 10 Set 02 10 to 0 to clear U1 40 Cooling Fan Operating Time Copying Parameters The Digital Operator can perform the following three functions using the built in EEPROM non volatile memory Store Inverter parameter set values in the Digital Operator READ Write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter COPY Compare parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator with Inverter parameters VERIFY BRelated Parameters Name mem TA Factory eter Description x ae Copy function selection o Normal operation 1 READ Inverter to Operator Copy Func Select 2 COPY Operator to Inverter 3 Verify compare Read permitted selec tion 0 Read prohibited 1 Read permitted Copy Allowable 6 82 Digital Operator Functions Storing Inverter set values in the Digital Operator READ To store Inverter set values in the Digital Operator
94. the baud rate for 6CN RS 422A 485 communications 0 1200 bps 2400 bps 4800 bps Serial Baud Rate 9600 bps 19200 bps Baud rate selection Communications parity selec tion Set the parity for 6CN RS 422A 485 communications i 0 No parity 1 Even parity Serial Comm Sel 2 Odd parity Communication error detec tion selection Set the stopping method for communications errors 0 Deceleration to stop using deceleration time in C1 02 1 Coast to a stop Serial Fault Sel 2 Emergency stop using deceleration time in C1 02 3 Continue operation Communications error detec d Set whether or not a communications timeout is to be tion selection detected as a communications error 0 Do not detect 1 Detect Serial Fit Dtct Send wait time Set the time from the Inverter receiving data to when the Transmit wait TIM Inverter starts to send RTS control ON OFF Select to enable or disable RTS control 0 Disabled RTS is always ON RTS Control Sel 1 Enabled RTS turns ON only when sending Set H5 01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to RS 422A 485 communications RS 422A 485 communications can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1 01 and b1 02 Monitoring operation status of the inverter Setting and reading parameters Resetting errors Inputting multi function commands AL An OR operation is performed between the m
95. turned OFF by the contact of the Braking Resistor Unit s thermal overload relay Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block Input power supply can be connected to any terminal R S or T on the terminal block the phase sequence of input power supply is irrelevant to the phase sequence Installing an AC Reactor If the Inverter is connected to a large capacity power transformer 600 kW or more or the phase advancing capacitor is switched an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit causing the con verter unit to break down To prevent this install an optional AC Reactor on the input side of the Inverter or a DC reactor to the DC reac tor connection terminals for units from 22 kW the DC reactor is standard This also improves the power factor on the power supply side Installing a Surge Absorber Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Inverter These inductive loads include mag netic contactors electromagnetic relays solenoid valves solenoids and magnetic brakes Installing a Noise Filter on Power Supply Side Install a noise filter to eliminate noise transmitted between the power line and the Inverter Correct Noise Filter Installation Power supply O 3G3PV MCCB Noise M filter Inverter Yi Fes We eve FS MCCB Use a special purpose noise filter for Inverters 2225 Other Ordinary SG3EV PLNFDLI 3GSIV PFNLI pom EMC compatible 3G3RV PFILI cont
96. value reaches minimum 90 of the over load detection level the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON Motor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermistor Inputs Perform motor overheating protection using the thermistor temperature resistance characteristics of the PTC Positive Temperature Coefficient built into the windings of each motor phase B Related Parameters Name Paame e eil eter Description Factory Number LCD Display Setting Set H3 09 to E and select the operation when the input motor temperature thermistor input exceeds the alarm detection level 1 17 V 0 Decelerate to stop 1 Coast to stop Mtr OH Alarm Sel 2 Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 3 Continue operation OH3 on the Digital Operator flashes Alarm operation selection dur ing motor overheating Motor overheating operation Set H3 09 to E and select the operation when the motor selection temperature thermistor input exceeds the operation detection level 2 34 V 0 Decelerate to stop Mtr OH Fault Sel l Coasttostop CT 2 Emergency stop using the deceleration time in C1 09 Motor temperature input filter time parameter Set H3 09 to E and set the primary delay time parameter 0 00 to for motor temperature thermistor inputs in seconds 10 00 Mtr Temp Filter EPTC Thermistor Characteristics The following diagram shows the characteristics of the PTC th
97. 0 110 0 Analog output 1 signal level selection FM AO Level Select 1 Sets the signal output level for multi function output 1 terminal FM 0 0 to 10 V output 2 4 to 20 mA Analog output signal 2 level selection AM AO Level Select 2 Sets the signal output level for multi function output 2 terminal FM 0 0 to 10 V output 2 4 to 20 mA Selecting Analog Monitor Items The digital operator monitor items U1 oo status monitor are output from multi function analog output ter minals FM AC and AM AC Refer to Chapter 5 Parameters and set the values for the 0 part of U1 O0 status monitor 6 50 Monitor Parameters E Adjusting the Analog Monitor Items Adjust the output voltage for multi function analog output terminals FM AC and AM AC using the gain and bias in H4 02 H4 03 H4 05 and H4 06 Adjusting the Meter The influence of the settings of gain and bias on the analog output channel is shown in Fig 6 51 10 V 100 monitor output x output gain output bias Output voltage Gain x 10 V dO NC og etse orem i oen NM A Bias x 10 100 V OV Monitor item 0 100 Fig 6 37 Monitor Output Adjustment 6 51 Individual Functions RS 422A 485 communications are configured using 1 master PLC and a maximum of 31 slaves Serial com munications between master and slave are normally started by the master and the slaves respond The master performs
98. 0 Hz 6 78 Individual Functions anything other than F you can only refer to parameters E1 04 to E1 10 If the V f characteristics are linear set EN When E1 03 is set to F User defined V f pattern you can set parameters E1 04 to E1 10 If E1 03 is set to E1 07 and E1 09 to the same value In this case E1 08 will be ignored INFO Output voltage V E1 05 VMAX E1 13 V Base E1 08 VC E1 10 VMIN 3 Frequency Hz E1 09 E1 07 E1 06 E1 04 FMIN FB FA FMAX Fig 6 46 User Set V f Pattern Setting Precautions When the setting is to user defined V f pattern beware of the following points When changing control method parameters E1 07 to E1 10 will change to the factory settings for that con trol method Be sure to set the four frequencies as follows E1 04 FMAX gt E1 06 FA gt E1 07 FB gt E1 09 FMIN 6 19 Digital Operator Functions Setting Digital Operator Functions Related Parameters Param eter Number Name LCD Display Monitor selection after power up Power ON Monitor Description Set the monitor item to be displayed when the power sup ply is turned ON Frequency reference 2 Output frequency 3 Output current 4 The monitor item set for 01 01 Factory Setting Access Level Frequency units of refer ence setting and monitor Display Scaling Sets the units that will be set and displayed for the fre
99. 0 0 to 10 V output Select 2 4 20 mA Analog output Sets the signal output level for 2 signal level multi function output 2 terminal selection AM AO Level 0 0 to 10 V output Select2 2 4 20 mA An analog output of 4 20 mA can not be used with the standard terminal board Therefore an optional terminal board with shunt connector CN15 is needed 5 24 LCD Display Station address BRS 422A 485 Communications H5 Description Serial Comm Adr Set the Inverter s node address Setting Range Factory Setting Access Level Parameter Tables RS 422A 485 Register Communica tion speed selection Set the baud rate for 6CN RS 422A 485 communications Serial Baud Rate 0 1200 bps 1 2400 bps 2 4800 bps 3 9600 bps 4 19200 bps Communica tion parity selection Set the parity for 6CN RS 422A 485 communications Serial Com Sel 0 No parity 1 Even parity 2 Odd parity Stopping method after communica tion error Serial Fault Sel Set the stopping method for com munications errors 0 Deceleration to stop using deceleration time in C1 02 1 Coast to stop 2 Emergency stop using decele ration time in C1 09 3 Continue operation Communica tion error detection selection Serial Fit Dtct Set whether or not a communica tions timeout is to be detected as a communications error 0 Do
100. 1 Fig 2 11 Countermeasures against Radio Interference Steel box Cable Length between Inverter and Motor If the cable between the Inverter and the motor is long the high frequency leakage current will increase caus ing the Inverter output current to increase as well This may affect peripheral devices To prevent this adjust the carrier frequency set in C6 01 C6 02 as shown in Table 2 6 For details refer to Chapter 5 Parameter Tables Table 2 6 Cable Length between Inverter and Motor Cabe length More than 100m i Ground Wiring Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line Always use the ground terminal of the 200 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 100 W and that of the 400 V Inverter with a ground resistance of less than 10 W Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or power tools Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire Leakage current flows through the Inverter Therefore if the distance between the ground electrode and the ground terminal is too long potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable When using more than one Inverter be careful not to loop the ground wire O X OK NO Er Fig 2 12 Ground Wiring iil Connecting an optional Braking Resistor Unit 3G3IV PLKB
101. 2 1 0 min operation at 60 Hz general purpose motor characteristics when L1 01 is set to 1 Operating time min Cold start 0 4 Hot start 21 Motor current 96 0 100 150 200 E2 01 is set to 10096 Fig 6 26 Motor Protection Operation Time ll Setting Precautions If multiple motors are connected to one Inverter set parameter L1 01 to 0 disabled To protect the motor install a thermal relay in the motor power cable and perform overload protection on each motor With applications where the power supply is often turned ON and OFF there is a risk that the circuit can not be protected even if this parameter has been set to 1 enabled because the thermal value will be reset For save overload tripping set the set value in parameter L1 02 to a low setting When using a general purpose motor standard motor the cooling ability will be lowered by f fre quency Consequently the frequency may cause motor overload protection OL1 to occur even below the rated current If operating on the rated current at a low frequency use a special motor i Setting the Motor Overload Pre Alarm If the motor overload protection function is enabled i e L1 01 is set to 1 and you set H2 01 or H2 02 multi function output terminals M1 M2 and M3 MA function selection to 1F motor overload pre alarm the 6 34 Machine Protection motor overload pre alarm will be enabled If the electronic thermal
102. 3 02 With this setting the acceleration time setting is ignored B Related Parameters Param C Setting Factory Access eter Description Number LCD Display Range Setting Level Stall prevention selection dur 0 Disabled Accelerates according to the setting Motor ing acceleration may stall if the load is too high 1 Enabled Acceleration stops when the level set in L3 02 is exceeded Acceleration continues when current value is reduced StallP Accel Sel 2 Optimum adjustment Adjusts acceleration using the level set in L3 02 as the standard The acceleration time setting is ignored Stall prevention level during acceleration Set as a percentage taking the Inverter rated current to be 100 Normally it is not necessary to change this setting Lower StallP Accel Lvl the set value if the motor stalls using the factory setting 0 to 200 120 B Time Chart The following figure shows the frequency characteristics when L3 01 is set to 1 Output current Stall level during L3 02 acceleration 3 02 coe 15 Time Output frequency l d4 J Output frequency is controlled to prevent the motor stalling Time Fig 6 19 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration llSetting Precautions If the motor capacity is small compared to the Inverter
103. 306 Sal prevention evel Gurngranning T3 Speed agreement detection 98 Speedagreement detecon wid 20 4205 Operation when frequency reference smise dT T206 Frequency Reference Tor loss of Frequency Reference RW FISOT Numberoraorsanawmps SSCS dT T502 Aue restart operation section 9 16 07 Torge detection seeen 8 7 L602 omgedeeconlwdT 19 E603 TTomuedeecon meT 9 LIEU Ovena 95 T803 Operation selection afer ovemheatpreaamm 3 IET AmBewiempsuue 70 15 012 characteristics section atow spes LIP PNI OI_ Hunting preventionTinction selection SSCS Td 1507 Huwmepewwinnim 7 19 LNTOD High lip braking deceleration Frequency PNEO2 H hsHpbrkmecunenTm E NETUS o S 9 02 Montor selecionar power SSCS ST CTY 01 03 Frequency units of reference setting md montor fo CD Brighmess 02 01 LOCALREMOTE Key emb
104. 3EV PLNFD2303DY 200 V Class 3G3EV PLNFD2203DY 3G3EV PLNFD2303DY 3G3EV PLNFD2303DY 3G3EV PLNFD2303DY 3G3EV PLNFD2303DY 3G3EV PLNFD2303DY 3G3EV PLNFD4053DY 3G3EV PLNFD4053DY 3G3EV PLNFD4103DY 3G3EV PLNFD4103DY 3G3EV PLNFD4153DY 3G3EV PLNFD4203DY 3G3EV PLNFD4303DY 3G3EV PLNFD4203DY 3G3EV PLNFD4303DY 3G3EV PLNFD4303DY 3G3EV PLNFD4303DY 3G3EV PLNFD4303DY 3G3EV PLNFD4303DY 3G3EV PLNFD4303DY Voltage Class 400 V Class 9 2 9 28 Wiring Example A wiring example for a Simple Input Noise Filter is shown below Input Noise Filter Inverter Dimensions The dimensions of a Simple Input Noise Filter are given below Dimensions Dimensions Diagram A Mounting Screws PLNFD2103DY PLNFD2153DY PLNFD2203DY PLNFD2303DY PLNFD4053DY PLNFD4103DY PLNFD4153DY PLNFD4203DY PLNFD4303DY Dimensions Diagram 1 Dimensions Diagram 2 Options and Peripheral Devices B Input Noise Filter An Input Noise Filter reduces noise coming into the inverter from the power supply line and to reduce noise flowing from the inverter into the power supply line Connect the Filter to the power supply input side 3631 V PFNLI Schaffner Models and Application The standard models of Input Noise Filters are listed in the following table
105. 4 PI feedback loss detection time Protective and Diagnostic Functions Probable Causes Corrective Actions External fault input from Communi cations Option Card Check the Communications Option Card and communications signals External fault Input terminal 3 External fault Input terminal 4 External fault Input terminal 5 External fault Input terminal 6 External fault Input terminal 7 An external fault was input from a multi function input terminal S3 to ST Resetexternal fault inputs to the multi function inputs Remove the cause of the exter nal fault Digital Operator Connection Fault The connection to the Digital Operator was broken during operation for a RUN command from the Digital Operator RS 422A 485 Communications Error A normal reception was not possible for 2 s or longer after control data was received once Check the connection to the Digi tal Operator Check the communications devices and communications sig nals Option Communications Error A communications error was detected during a run command or while setting a frequency reference from a Commu nications Option Card Check the communications devices and communications sig nals 1 _ nm wu Digital Operator Communications Error 1 Communications with the Digital Operator were not established within 5 seconds after the power was turned on The Digital
106. 5 C Open chassis type Ambient operating humid ity 95 max with no condensation Storage temperature 20 C to 60 C short term temperature during transportation Application site Indoor no corrosive gas dust etc Altitude 1000 m max Vibration 10 to 20 Hz 9 8 m s max 20 to 50 Hz 2 m s max Increase the Inverter capacity if loads exceeding these current values are expected If applied in higher altitudes contact your OMRON representative Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices The following options and peripheral devices can be used for the Inverter Select them according to the application Purpose Protect Inverter wiring MCCB or Ground Fault Interrupter Table 9 4 Options and Peripheral Devices Model Code Example Mitsubishi Electrics NV Series Descriptions Always connect a breaker to the power supply line to pro tect Inverter wiring Use a ground fault interrupter suitable for high frequencies Power supply Prevents burning when a Braking Resistor is used Magnetic Contac tor Example Fuji Electrics SC Series Install to prevent the braking resistor from burning out when one is used Always attach a surge absorber to the coil Contains switching surge Surge Absorber MCCB or ground fault Absorbs surge from the magnetic contactor and control interrupter relays Connect surge absorbers to all
107. 6 Power cables e g 600 V vinyl S L2 T L3 cables 14 to 22 a W T2 W T3 6 to 4 S R LI S L2 T L3 1 2 U T1 V T2 40050 30 to 38 W T3 4 to 2 a 22 4 0 to 5 0 4 R LI S L2 T L3 1 2 U T1 V T2 90t0100 291038 W T3 3 to 2 22 4 4 0 to 5 0 R LI S L2 T L3 1 U T1 V T2 30 to 60 9 0 to 10 0 W T3 R1 L11 811 21 TI L31 3 to 1 81022 4 0 to 5 0 804 22 to 38 9 0 to 10 0 182 R LI S L2 T L3 1 U TI 50 to 60 9 0 to 10 0 V T2 W T3 1 11 SI L21 T1 L31 1 to 1 0 81022 8 to 4 22 to 38 4 to 2 4 0 to 5 0 9 0 to 10 0 Recom Inverter Tightening Possible mended Model Terminal Symbol Ves Torque Wire Sizes Wire Size Wire Type 3G3PV Nem mm2 AwG mm AWG R L1 S L2 T L3 41 U TI 17 6 to 22 5 60 to 100 V T2 W T3 RI L11 SI L21 T1 L31 2 0 to 4 0 5 5 to 22 10 to 4 30 to 60 2 to 2 0 0 5 to 5 5 20 to 10 R LI S L2 T L3 1 U TI 17 6to22 5 809100 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 S1 L21 TI L31 3 0 to 4 0 zx 5 5 to 22 c3 8 8 to 10 8 38 to 60 38 1 to 2 0 1 0 5 to 5 5 125 8 8 to 10 8 17 6 to 22 5 r 11 A I2 1 3 to 1 4 17 6 to 22 5 r ll A I2 1 3 to 1 4 20 to 10 16 5010 100 50x2P R LI S L2 T L3 1 314 to 39 2 nos
108. B416K E Inverter outputs U T1 V T2 W T3 A2004 E to A2900 E A4004 E to A416K E B2220 E to B211K E B4220 E to B416K E DC power input A2004 E to A2900 E A4004 E to A416K E B2220 E to B211K E B4220 E to B416K E DC reactor connection A2004 E to A2185 E A4004 E to A4185 E Braking Unit connection A2004 E to A2900 E A4220 E to A416K E B2220 E to B211K E B4220 E to B416K E Ground A2004 E to A2900 E A4004 E to A416K E B2220 E to B211K E B4220 E to B416K E Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Main Circuit Configurations The main circuit configurations of the Inverter are shown in Fig 2 5 Table 2 5 Inverter Main Circuit Configurations 200 V Class 400 V Class 3G3PV A2004 E to A2185 E 3G3PV A4004 E to A4185 E Control ontrol circuits i rcuits 3G3PV A2220 E A2300 E 3G3PV A4220 E to A4550 E 3G3PV B2220 E B2300 E 3G3PV B4220 E to B4550 E Control circuits Power Control supply circuits 3G3PV A4750 E to A416K E 3G3PV A2370 E to A2900 E 3G3PV B4750 E to B416K E 3G3PV B2370 E to B211K E gt 1 R L1 5 12 S L2 TAS
109. Doers at Mounting taps Rubber bushing Weight 1 8 kg Panel Cutout Standard Analog Operator with Steel Panels Front panel mounting space SY Panel Cutout hole Mounting taps 5 tap Weight 0 8 kg Panel Cutout Small Plastic Analog Operator 9 12 Options and Peripheral Devices B Braking Unit A Braking Unit is used with a Braking Resistor Unit to reduce the deceleration time of the motor It is not required with Inverters of 18 5 kW or less 3G31V PCDBROB Models and Application The standard models of Braking Units are listed in the following table Inverter Braking Unit Voltage Max Applicable Motor Class Capacity kW Min Resistance Model No Qty Used Q Built in 200 V Class 3G3IV CDBR2022B 3G3IV CDBR2015B 3G3IV CDBR2015B 3G3IV CDBR2022B 3G3IV CDBR2022B 3G3IV CDBR2022B 3G3IV CDBR2022B 3G3IV CDBR2022B Ot Gp NINI Built in 400 V Class 3G3IV CDBR4030B 3G3IV CDBR4030B 3G3IV CDBR4045B 3G3IV CDBR4045B 3G3IV CDBR4030B 3G3IV CDBR4045B 3G3IV CDBR4045B 3G3IV CDBR4030B 3G3IV CDBR4045B 3G3IV CDBR4045B va o to wo A The minimum resistance is the minimum value per Braking Unit except for Inverters of 18 5 kW or less in which
110. Fig 1 5 The Inverter with the ter minal cover removed is shown in Fig 1 6 _ Mounting holes Inverter cover Z Cooling fan Front cover Digital Operator Terminal cover Nameplate Fig 1 5 Inverter Appearance 22 kW or More Control circuit terminals Charge indicator 251 UTI V72 Main circuit terminals Ground terminal Fig 1 6 Terminal Arrangement 22 kW or More 1 8 Dee _ Exterior and Mounting Dimensions Open Chassis Inverters IP00 Exterior diagrams of the Open Chassis Inverters are shown below 200 V Class Inverters of 37 to 110 kW 400 V Class Inverters of 75 to 160 kW 200 V Class Inverters of 22 or 30 kW 400 V Class Inverters of 22 to 55 kW Fig 1 7 Exterior Diagrams of Open Chassis Inverters Enclosed Wall mounted Inverters NEMA1 Exterior diagrams of the Enclosed Wall mounted Inverters NEMA1 are shown below wW poe wi 4d f S Tn 1
111. G3PV B4750 E 400 V class 90 kW 3G3PV B4900 E 110 kW 3G3PV B411K E 132kW 3G3PV B413K E 160 kW 3G3PV B416K E 1 4 s Confirmations upon Delivery Checks Check the following items as soon as the Inverter is delivered Table 1 2 Checks Item Method Check the model number the nameplate on the side of the Inverter Inspect the entire exterior of the Inverter to see if there are any scratches or Is the Inverter damaged in any way At other damage resulting from shipping Are any screws or other components ned P Use a screwdriver or other tools to check for tightness If you find any irregularities in the above items contact the agency from which you purchased the Inverter or your OMRON representative immediately Nameplate Information There is a nameplate attached to the side of each Inverter The nameplate shows the model number specifica tions lot number serial number and other information on the Inverter B Example Nameplate The following nameplate is an example for an European Inverter 3 phase 200 VAC 37 kW IEC IPOO Inverter model OMRON 3G3PV B2370 E museo INPUT ACSBH 200 220 Output specification OUTPUT AC3PH 0 230V 0 400Hz 145A 55kVA Lot number LOT NO MASS 57kg Mass Serial number SER NO PRG OMRON Corporation SDE Mg Fi
112. General Precautions a General Precautions Observe the following Precautions when using the SYSDRIVE Inverters and peripheral devices This manual may include illustrations of the product with protective covers removed in order to describe the components of the product in detail Make sure that these protective covers are on the product before use Consult your OMRON representative when using the product after a long period of storage Definition of Precautionary Information AN DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which if not avoided will result in death or serious injury AN WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided could result in death or serious injury AN Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which if not avoided may result in minor or moderate injury or property damage WARNING touch the inside of the Inverter Doing so may result in electric shock Wiring or inspection must be performed only after turning OFF the power sup ply confirming that the CHARGE indicator or status indicator is OFF and after waiting for the time specified on the front cover Not doing so may result in electrical shock WARNING Do not damage pull on apply stress to place heavy objects on or pinch the cables Doing so may result in electrical shock Do not touch the rotating parts of the motor under operation Doing so may result in injury Do not
113. IFY AUTO ee onitor data TUNING 95 OMRON DIGITAL OPERATOR PJVOP161 Mode Display DRIVE Lit in Drive Mode QUICK Lit in Quick Programming Mode ADV Lit in Advanced Programming Mode VERIFY Lit in Verify Mode AUTO Lit in Autotuning Mode Keys STOP Digital Operator with LCD Display 3G3IV PJVOP160 Execute operations such as setting user parame ters monitoring jogging and autotuning REMOTE L L i i FWD REV SEQ REF ALARM LL Drive Mode Indicators FWD Lit when there is forward run command input REV Lit when there is a reverse run command input SEQ Lit when the run command from the control circuit terminal is enabled REF Lit when the frequency reference from control circuit terminals A1 and A2 is enabled ALARM Lit when an error or alarm has occurred Data Display Displays monitor data parameter numbers and OMRON DIGITAL OPERATOR PJVOP160 __ settings JOG Keys FWD Execute operations such as setting user parame REV ters monitoring jogging and autotuning RUN STOP 1 Fig 3 1 Digital Operator Component Names and Functions Digital Operator Digital Operator Keys The names and functions of the Digital Operator Keys are described in Table 3 1 Table 3 1 Key Functions Function Switches between operation via the Digital Operator LOCAL and LOCAL REMOTE Key control circuit terminal operatio
114. IV PUZBAB2 5A8 4MH 3G3IV PUZBAB5A4 2MH 3G3IV PUZBAB7 5A3 6MH 3G3IV PUZBAB10A2 2MH 3G3IV PUZBABI5A1 42MH 3G3IV PUZBAB20A1 06MH 400 V Class 3G3IV PUZBAB30A0 7MH 3G3IV PUZBAB40A0 53MH 3G3IV PUZBAB50A0 42MH 3G3IV PUZBAB60A0 36MH 3G3IV PUZBAB80A0 26MH 3G3IV PUZBAB90A0 24MH 3G3IV PUZBABI120A0 18MH 3G3IV PUZBABI150A0 15MH 9 20 Options and Peripheral Devices Wiring Example A wiring example for an AC Reactor is shown below AC reactor Dimensions The dimensions of a DC Reactor are given below Model Dimen Dimensions mm 3G3IV sions PUZBABO Diagram E F 2 5 42 5 2 1 10 1 1 15A0 71MH 20A0 53MH 30A0 35MH 40A0 265MH 60A0 18MH 80A0 13MH 90A0 12MH 20A0 00MH 60A0 07MH 75 200A0 05MH 75 240A0 044MH 215 5 280A0 038MH 215 5 3A18 0MH 20 2 5A8 4MH 20 5A4 2MH 30 7 5A3 6MH 30 0A2 2MH 30 5A1 42MH 30 20A1 06MH 30 30A0 7MH 130 40A0 53MH 50 50A0 42MH 50 60A0 36MH 50 80A0 26MH 75 90A0 24MH 175 120A0 18MH 205 5 150 0 15 205 5 SES uy Ut OY BY u Vo j S I SP SP 3 3 S Terminal
115. LKEB2022 4800 W 6 8 3G3IV PLKEB2022 4800 W 6 8 3G3IV PLKEB2022 4800 W 6 8 3G3IV PLKEB2022 4800 W 6 8 3G3IV PLKEB2018 4800 W 8 Q 400 V Class 3G3IV PLKEB40P7 70 W 750 Q 3G3IV PLKEB40P7 70 W 750 Q 3G3IV PLKEBA1P5 260 W 400 Q 3G3IV PLKEB42P2 260 W 250 Q 3G3IV PLKEB43P7 390 W 150 Q 3G3IV PLKEB45P5 520 W 100 Q 3G3IV PLKEB47P5 780 W 75 3G3IV PLKEB4011 1040 W 50 Q 3G3IV PLKEB4015 1560 W 40 Q 3G3IV PLKEB4018 4800 W 32 Q 3G3IV PLKEB4022 4800 W 27 2 Q 3G3IV PLKEB4030 6000 W 20 Q 3G3IV PLKEB4037 9600 W 16 Q 3G3IV PLKEB4045 9600 W 13 6 Q 3G3IV PLKEB4030 6000 W 20 Q 3G3IV PLKEB4045 9600 W 13 6 Q 3G3IV PLKEB4045 9600 W 13 6 Q 3G3IV PLKEB4030 6000 W 20 Q 3G3IV PLKEB4045 9600 W 13 6 Q 3G3IV PLKEB4045 9600 W 13 6 Q Dimensions The dimensions of a Braking Resistor Unit are given below Voltage Model No Dimensions mm g 3G3IV Dimensions x SLES PLKEBo Diagram Screws 200 V Class 400 V Class Mounting screw 260 200 min Dimensions Diagram 2 Dimensions Diagram 1 Options and Peripheral Devices B Digital Operator Connection Cable Connected the Inver
116. LKEBLI Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to reduce deceleration time use rate 10 ED DC Reactor 3G3HV PUZDABLI Used to control harmonics generated by the Inverter and to improve the input power fac tor of the Inverter All Inverters of 18 5 kW or higher contain built in DC reactors Digital Operator with LCD Display 3G3IV PJVOP160 Displays messages on a LCD Digital Operator with LED Display 3G3IV PJVOP161 Display messages on a LED display Standard in Asia and Europe Digital Operator Connec tion Cable 3G3IV PCNI26 1 m 3G3IV PCN326 E 3 m Extension cable to use a 3G3PV series Digital Operator remotely Cable length 1 mor3m Personal Computer cable 3G3IV PCN329 E Connection cable for connecting the 3G3PV series Inverter to the SYSDrive configura tor software tool on Personal Computer Option cards DeviceNet Communica tions Card 3G3FV PDRTI SIN Used for DeviceNet communications with a Programmable Controller or other DeviceNet master device Terminal cards Standard terminal card 3G3PV PETC618140 Standard terminal card for standard operation Optional terminal card 3G3PV PETC618120 Optional terminal card with shunt connector CN15 for switching the analog output levels between 0 10V or 4 to 20 mA Recommended Separately Installed 1 Options AC Reactor 3G3IV PUZBABLI Used to control harmonics gen
117. Less 1 13 9 inverters of 22 KW Or MOIe tente it nte ict rr tp hd 1 16 2 Lii 2 1 QE DID DUET EET 2 2 Connections to Peripheral Devices seem 2 3 Connection Diagrams sesssssseeeeeeeneen mener 2 4 Circuit descriptions tnnt 2 5 Terminal Block Configuration eene 2 6 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals cccccececeeeeeeeeeceeeeseneeeeeeeeneeeeeesesneeeees 2 7 Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed loop Connectors 2 7 Main Circuit Terminal functions ssssssessseetertetnntettttene tenens 2 12 Main Circuit configurations cccecccccssessessssesesesssssessessseescssssceseasesteseassseessaseseessaceseeseas 2 13 Standard Connection Diagrams etre ntes 2 14 Wiring the Main Circuits netten 2 15 Wiring Control Circuit 2 22 WireSizes dn aic tnde bn esta At Orts reet s dte leds 2 22 Control Circuit Terminal Functions 2 24 Control Circuit Terminal Connections treten 2 27 Control Circuit Wiring Precautions essent 2 28 Wiring Check eiii ici eat ee eee tee 2 29 Checks dtd ac eta ima D d d d d Ha 2 29 Installing and Wiring Op
118. Lower 04H Next stor Higher 00H Higher 45H age register Lower 00H CRC 16 Lower FOH Next stor Higher 00H age register ower 00H Nextstor Higher 01H age register ower F4H Higher AFH CRC 16 Lower 82H 6 56 Individual Functions a Loopback Test The loopback test returns command messages directly as response messages without changing the contents to check the communications between the master and slave You can set user defined test code and data values The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 Inverter Response Message Response Message Command Message During Normal Operation During Error Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Function code 08H Function code 08H Function code 89H Higher 00H Higher 00H Error Code 01H Test Code Test Code Lower 00H Lower 00H Higher 86H CRC 16 Higher ASH Higher ASH Lower 50H Data Data Lower 37H Lower 37H Higher DAH Higher DAH CRC 16 CRC 16 Lower 8DH Lower 8DH Writing to Multiple Storage Registers Write the specified data to the registers from the specified addresses The written data must be consecutive starting from the specified address in the command message Higher 8 bits then lower 8 bits in storage regis ter address order The following table shows an example of a message when forward operation has been set at
119. Motor Overload Motor Overload 5 26 L2 Power Loss Ridethrough PwrLoss Ridethru 527 L3 Stall Prevention Stall Prevention 5 28 L4 Reference Detection Ref Detection 5 29 L5 Fault Restart Fault Restart 5 29 16 Torque Detection Torque Detection 5 30 L8 Hardware Protection Hdwe Protection 5 30 ni Hunting Prevention Function Hunting Prev 5 32 n3 High slip Braking High Slip 5 32 o1 Monitor Select Monitor Select 5 33 02 Multi function Selections Key Selections 5 35 o3 Copy Function COPY Function 5 36 T Motor Autotuning Auto Tuning 5 36 5 4 Parameters Setable in Quick Programming Mode The minimum parameters required for Inverter operation can be monitored and set in quick programming mode The parameters displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table These and all other parameters are also displayed in advanced programming mode Refer to the overview of modes on page 3 5 for an overview of quick programming mode Name LCD Display Reference selection Reference Source Description Set the frequency reference input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal analog input 2 RS 422A 485 communications 3 Option Card Setting Factory Range Setting Access Level RS 422A 485 Reg ister Operation tion method selec Run Source Set the run command input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal sequence input 2 RS 422A
120. Operator 1 Control circuit terminal sequence input 2 RS 422A 485 communications Run Source 3 Option Card the local remote function has been set in the external terminals the LOCAL REMOTE Key function on the 5 You also perform local remote switching using the LOCAL REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator When Digital Operator will be disabled INFO Blocking Inverter Outputs Baseblock Commands Set 8 or 9 Baseblock command NO NC in one of the parameters H1 01 to H1 05 multi function contact input terminal 3 to S7 function selection to perform baseblock commands using the terminal s ON OFF operation and prohibit Inverter output using the baseblock commands Clear the baseblock command to restart the operating using speed search from the frequency reference value before the baseblock command was input Multi function Contact Inputs H1 01 to H1 05 Set External baseblock NO Normally Open contact Baseblock when ON External baseblock NC Normally Closed contact Baseblock when OFF 6 46 Input Terminal Functions B Time Chart The time chart when using baseblock commands is shown below Forward operation Stop npu Baseblock command kad Frequency reference a Search from stored frequency reference Output frequency Coast to a stop Fig 6 35 Baseblock Commands UL If using baseblock commands with a variable load do not frequently input bas
121. Output current 10 ms N Minimum baseblock time Speed Search Wait Time L2 03 b3 05 Note If the frequency immediately before the baseblock is low or the power supply break time is long operation may be the same as the search in case 1 Fig 6 31 Speed Search after Baseblock Estimated Speed Loss Time gt L2 03 6 41 E Current Detection Speed Search Speed Search at Startup The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command is selected is shown below Deceleration time set in b3 03 Run command Set fequency A reference Maximum output frequency or set frequency Output frequency b3 02 Output current Coe baseblock time Lower limit is set using Speed Search Time b3 05 Fig 6 32 Speed Search at Startup Using Current Detection Speed Search after Short Baseblock during Power Loss Recovery etc Loss Time Shorter Than Minimum Baseblock Time AS power Suy ON ORE Output frequency before power loss Z Deceleration time E fequency 4 Set in b3 03 reterence Output frequency b3 02 speed search operating current Output current 1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output Cr frequency immediately before baseblock Minimum baseblock time L2 03 1 2 After AC power supply recovery motor waits for the minimum Speed Search Wait Time b2 03 2 Fig 6 33
122. R LI S L2 T L3 1 U T1 V T2 W 22 to 60 9 0 to 10 0 SI L21 TI L31 4 to 1 0 81022 8 to 4 221038 4 to 2 4 0 to 5 0 9 0 to 10 0 4 0 to 5 0 9 0 to 10 0 Inverter Model 3G3PV Terminal Symbol Tightening Torque Nem Possible Wire Sizes mm AWG Recom mended Wire Size mm AWG Wire Type R LI S L2 T L3 U TL V T W wg 9 010100 38 to 60 R1 L11 SI L21 TI L31 2 to 1 0 2 4450 81022 445 3 M6 4 0 to 5 0 8 124 221038 22 di M8 9 0to 10 0 1523 4 R LI S L2 T L3 1 U TI V T2 M8 90to100 91960 50 W T3 R1 L11 81121 TI L31 1 to 1 0 1 A4550 E 81022 B4SS0E 3 M6 4 0 to 5 0 Bim 22 to 38 22 D q M8 9 0to 10 0 ZEE 60 to 100 60 1 S L2 T L3 1 MI2 31 4 to 39 2 2 0 to 4 0 2 0 50 to 100 50 U T1 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 81121 T1 L31 MIO 17610225 oio 4 0 1 A4750 E 5 5 to 22 ee 8 8810108 1010 4 E 38 to 60 38 di MI2 31410392 00020 2 0 5 to 5 5 125 A200 200 400 5400 o M4 1 3 014 01510 pm 80 to 100 100 1 S L2 T L3 D1 MI2 31 4 to 39 2 3 0 to 4 0 4 0 80 to 100 100 U T1 V T2 W T3 R1 L11 S1 L21 T1 L31 MIO 17610225 Gio 4
123. Run Command Source Set parameter b1 02 to select the source for the run command B Related Parameters Param eter Number Performing Operations U When b1 02 is set to 0 you can perform Inverter operations using the Digital Operator keys RUN STOP JOG and FWD REV For details on the Digital Operator refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes Performing Operations Using Control Circuit Terminals When b1 02 is set to 1 you can perform Inverter operations using the control circuit terminals Name LCD Display Operation method selec tion Run Source Description Set the run command source 0 Digital operator 1 Control circuit terminal sequence input 2 RS 422A 485 communications 3 Option Card sing a Digital Operator Performing Operations Using a 2 wire Sequence The factory setting is set to a 2 wire sequence When control circuit terminal S1 is set to ON forward opera tion will be performed and when S1 is turned OFF the Inverter will stop In the same way when control cir cuit terminal S2 is set to ON reverse operation will be performed and when 2 is turned OFF the Inverter will stop Forward Stop Reverse Stop Setting Range sc Sequence common Fig 6 9 2 wire Sequence Wiring Example Factory Setting Change during Opera tion Run Command Performing Operations Using a 3 wire Sequence When any parameter from H1 01 to H1 05 m
124. Speed Search After Baseblock Current Detection Loss Time L2 03 Loss Time Longer Than Minimum Baseblock Time AC power supply ON Output frequency before power loss Set fequency reference 7 Deceleration speed set 63 0 p Ld Output frequency b3 02 Speed search operating time ym Output current Speed search wait time b3 05 4 hoi Minimum baseblock time L2 03 Fig 6 34 Speed Search After Baseblock Current Detection Loss Time gt L2 03 Continuing Operation Continuing Operation at parameter Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost The frequency reference loss detection function continues operation at reduced speed using the set value in parameter L4 06 as frequency reference value When using an analog input as frequency reference a fre quency reference loss is detected when the reference value drops over 90 in 400 ms or less When the error signal during frequency reference loss is output externally set H2 01 or H2 02 multi function contact output terminal M1 M2 and M3 M4 function selection to C frequency reference lost B Related Parameters Setting Factory i Access m ET ike EM when fre quency reference is 0 Stop _ missing 1 Operation L4 06 fref loss inverter runs with reduced speed No A Frequency reference is lost Frequency reference dropped BC Lose Sel 90 in 400 ms Output frequency adjust m
125. a frequency refer ence of 60 0 Hz in the slave 1 Inverter by the PLC Response Message Response Message Command Messagg During Normal Operation During Error Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Function Code 10H Function Code 10H Function Code 90H Start Higher 00H Start Higher 00H Error code 02H Address Lower 01H Address Lower 01H Higher CDH CRC 16 Higher 00H Higher 00H Lower CIH Quantity Quantity Lower 02H Lower 02H No of data 04H Higher 10H CRC 16 Higher 00H Lower 08H Lead data Lower 01H Higher 02H Next data Lower 58H No of data 2 x quantity Higher 63H CRC 16 Lower 39H Set the number of data specified using command messages as quantity of specified messages 2 Handle P response messages in the same way IMPORTANT 6 5 EData Tables The data tables are shown below The types of data as follows Reference data monitor data and broadcast data Reference Data The reference data table is shown below You can both read and write reference data Register No Contents Reserved Frequency reference Bit 0 Run stop command 1 Run 0 Stop Bit 1 Forward reverse operation 1 Reverse 0 Forward Bit 2 External error 1 Error EFO Bit 3 Error reset 1 Reset command Bit 4 ComNet Bit 5 ComCtrl Bit 6 Multi function input command 3 Bit 7 Multi funct
126. able writing Parameters with the Digital Operator Illegal read data The read data length does not agree The write data is incorrect Repeat the read Check the Digital Operator cable Replace the Digital Operator Illegal write status ID not matched An attempted write of a Parameter to EEPROM on the Digital Writer failed The Inverter product code or software number is different A low Inverter voltage has been detected Repeat the read Replace the Digital Operator Use the copy function for the same product code and software number Inverter capacity matched The capacity of the Inverter being copied and the capacity in the Digital Operator are different Use the copy function for the same Inverter capacity Verify error The parameter written to the Inverter was compared with the parameter in the Digital Operator and they were different Retry the copy Checksum error The checksum in the Inverter parame ter area was compared with the check sum in the Digital Operator parameter area and they were different Retry the copy Troubleshooting Due to parameter setting errors faulty wiring and so on the Inverter and motor may not operate as expected when the system is started up If that occurs use this section as a reference and apply the appro priate measures If the contents of the fault are displayed refer to Prot
127. age Operation and Adjustment Precautions a Operation and Adjustment Precautions WARNING Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover terminal covers bottom cover Operator and optional items Not doing so may result in electrical shock WARNING Do not remove the front cover terminal covers bottom cover Operator or optional items while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in elec trical shock or damage to the product WARNING Do not operate the Operator or switches with wet hands Doing so may result in electrical shock WARNING Do not touch the Inverter terminals while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electrical shock WARNING Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm Doing so may result in injury WARNING Do not come close to the machine immediately after resetting momentary power interruption to avoid an unexpected restart if operation is set to be con tinued in the processing selection function after momentary power is reset Doing so may result in injury WARNING Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP Key on the Oper ator is valid only when function settings are performed Not doing so may result in injury WARNING Be sure to confirm that the RUN signal is turned OFF before tuning ON the power suppl
128. al Operator and then re install it 7 12 Troubleshooting If the Motor Does Not Operate The motor does not operate when the RUN key on the Digital Operator is pressed The following causes are possible AL If the Inverter is not in drive mode it will remain in ready status and will not start Press the Menu Key to make the DRIVE indicator flash and enter the drive mode by pressing the ENTER key The DRIVE tor will light when drive mode is entered IMPORTANT The operation method setting is wrong If parameter b1 02 Operation Method Selection is set to 1 control circuit terminal the motor will not oper ate when the Run key is pressed Either press the LOCAL REMOTE key to switch to Digital Operator opera tion or set b1 02 to 0 Digital Operator The LOCAL REMOTE key is enabled by setting 02 01 to 1 and disabled by setting 02 01 to 0 It is enabled when the drive mode is entered INFO The frequency reference is too low If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency the Inverter will not operate Raise the frequency reference to at least the minimum output frequency i The motor does not operate when an external operation signal is input The following causes are possible The Inverter is not in drive mode If the Inverter is not in drive mode it will remain in ready status and will not start Pressing the MENU key makes the DRIVE i
129. al speed is approaching the output frequency the slip is decreasing and the motor is going back to the linear zone where it increases efficiency 2 When the motor is in the linear area of the Torque slip curve normal behaviour the efficiency is high and the regenaration to the inverter is big This causes the increase of the DC bus If the DC voltage reaches the Overvoltage OV level the inverter reduces suddenly the frequency according the value pro grammed in N3 01 and returning to the High slip low efficiency zone of the Torque slip curve and the process of step 1 is repeated 3 This step is not always necessary If step 2 is not sufficient enough to stop the motor and the DC volt age increases again the inverter takes an other action similar like step 2 After these steps the inverter runs during 1 5s at minimum speed and decellerates to zero following the pro grammed ramp This last process is to be sure that the output frequency decreases to zero so that the linear area of the Torque slip curve is reached w The motor will overheat with this stopping method carefull to guarantee good ventilation to the motor Most AC motors have a thermal resistor or a clixon built in e It is strogly recommended to use the thermal resistor in case of overheating Using an Emergency Stop Set a multi function input terminal H1 L1L1 to 28 to 2B emergency stop to decelerate to a stop at the decel eration time set
130. alarm level Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up to 2 0 seconds is required for 200 V class Inverters with outputs of 0 4 to 11 kW If C6 02 is set to 0 1 or F and the initial value of C6 03 and C6 04 is 2 0 kHz the initial settings for C6 02 are as follows 2 5 0 kHz 3 8 0 kHz 4 10 kHz 5 12 5 kHz and 6 15 kHz If the carrier frequency is set higher than the factory setting for Inverters with outputs of 7 5 kW or more the Inverter rated current will need to be reduced Chapter 6 Parameter Settings by function Application and Overload Selections 6 2 Frequency Reference esee 6 4 Run Command et ro Rr tme tette tern 6 8 Stopping Methods essere 6 10 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics 6 17 Adjusting Frequency References eese 6 22 Speed Limit Frequency Reference Limit Function 6 26 Improved Operating Efficiency esee 6 27 Machine Protection esses eene 6 30 Continuing 6 37 Inverter Protection eene 6 45 Input Terminal Functions eese 6 46 Monitor ParameteT Sinergie tocasse 6 50 Individual 6 52 Digital Operator
131. ameters The following settings are made with the autotuning parameters C parameters Acceleration deceleration times S curve characteristics slip compensation torque compensation speed control and carrier frequency functions E Acceleration Deceleration C1 Name Parana mci M 3 RS 422A EM Setting Factory eter 3 Description 485 Number LCD Display Range Setting Register MAD Sets the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to the Accel Time 1 maximum output frequency Deceleration tire Sets the deceleration time to decelerate from the maximum output frequency to 0 Decel Time 1 Acceleration time 2 The acceleration time when the multi function input accel decel Accel Time 2 time 1 is set to ON Deceleration time 2 The deceleration time when the multi function input accel decel Decel Time 2 time 1 is set to ON Emergency stop time The deceleration time when the multi function input Emergenc Fast Stop ais P gency Time fast stop is set to ON Accel decel Sets the frequency for automatic time switch ing frequency acceleration deceleration switch ing Below set frequency Accel decel time 2 Acc Dec SW Above set frequency Accel decel Freq time 1 The multi function input accel decel time 1 or accel decel time 2 has priority ES curve Acceleration Deceleration C2 Param
132. and Braking Unit 3G3IV PCDBR Connect the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit to the Inverter as shown in the Fig 2 13 To prevent the Unit from overheating design the sequence to turn OFF the power supply for the thermal over load relay trip contacts of the Unit as shown in Fig 2 13 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 0 4 to 18 5 kW Output 3G3IV PCD 3G3IV PLKBO BRO Braking Braking Resis Unit tor Unit Po Thermal protector Inverter trip contact B WW gi Thermal overload relay trip contact 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters with 22 kW or higher Output 3G3IV PCD 3G3IV PLKBO BRO Braking Braking Resistor Unit Unit Thermal protector Inverter trip contact hermal overload relay trip contact Fig 2 13 Connecting the Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit UL When using an optional Braking Unit and Braking Resistor Unit the parameter L3 04 Stall prevention selection during deceleration has to be set to 0 Otherwise stall prevention is enabled and the Braking Unit will not work IMPORTANT 2 20 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Connecting Braking Units in Parallel When connecting two or more Braking Units in parallel use the wiring and connectors shown in Fig 2 14 There are connectors for selecting whether each Braking Unit is to be a Master or Slave Select Master for the first Braking Unit only and select Slave
133. and the maxi mum frequency and the speed is detected at the search current level Factory Setting Speed search oper ating current current detection SPDSrch Current Sets the speed search operation current as a percentage taking the Inverter rated current as 100 Not usually necessary to set When restarting is not possible with the factory settings reduce the value Speed search deceleration time cur rent detec tion SPDScrh Dec Time Sets the output frequency decel eration time during speed search in 1 second units Set the time for deceleration from the maximum output frequency to the minimum output frequency Speed search wait time cur rent detec tion or speed calculation Search Delay Sets the contactor operating delay time when there is a contactor on the output side of the Inverter When a speed search is per formed after recovering from a momentary power loss the search operation is delayed by the time set here EPI Control b5 Param eter Number Name LCD Display PI control mode selec tion PI Mode Description 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Setting Range Factory Setting Parameter Tables RS 422A 485 Register Proportional gain P PI Gain Sets P control proportional gain as a percentage P control is not performed when the setting is 0 00 Integral 1 time PI I Time
134. ation S curve characteristics C2 01 and C2 02 Used to prevent shock when completing acceleration Jump frequencies d3 01 to d3 04 Used to avoid resonance points during acceleration or deceleration Used to prevent OV overvoltage errors and motor stalling for heavy loads or rapid acceleration deceleration Stall prevention is enabled by default and the setting normally has not to be changed When using a braking resistor however disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L3 04 to 0 Stall prevention L3 01 to L3 06 4 13 Chapter 5 Parameters This chapter describes all parameters that can be set in the Inverter Parameter Descriptions esee 5 2 Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels 5 3 Parameter Tables ue eee eh ais 5 7 Ne arameter Descriptions This section describes the contents of the parameters tables Description of Parameter Tables Parameters tables are structured as shown below Here b1 01 Frequency Reference Selection is used as an example Name 5 422 Description Setting Factory Access 485 Regis LCD Display Range Setting Level ter Reference Set the frequency reference selection input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal analog input 2 RS 422A 485 communi Reference cations Source 3 Option Card 5 2 e Parameter Number Name Descript
135. ator as shown in the follow ing illustration Fig 1 12 Removing the Digital Operator Model 3G3PV A4055 E Shown Above 1 13 the Front Cover Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows 1 and lift the bottom of the cover in the direction of arrow 2 to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration Fig 1 13 Removing the Front Cover Model 3G3PV A4055 E Shown Above E Mounting the Front Cover After wiring the terminals mount the front cover to the Inverter by performing the steps to remove the front cover in reverse order 1 Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover otherwise Digital Operator may malfunction due to imperfect contact 2 Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover into the groove of the Inverter and press the lower part of the front cover onto the Inverter until the front cover snaps shut E Mounting the Digital Operator After attaching the terminal cover mount the Digital Operator onto the Inverter using the following proce dure 1 Hook the Digital Operator at A two locations on the front cover in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in the following illustration 2 Press the Digital Operator in the direction of arrow 2 until it snaps in place at B two locati
136. be initialized to the settings saved in the separate memory area by setting A1 03 Initialize to 1110 Access Levels A1 01 1 01 can be set to 0 monitoring only to prevent parameters from being changed If A1 01 is set to 2 advanced programming all parameters can be read or written 4 11 _ 1 04 1 05 When the access level is set to monitoring only 1 01 0 a password can be set so that parameters will be displayed only when the correct password is input Adjustment Suggestions Adjustment Suggestions If hunting vibration or other problems originating in the control system occur during trial operation adjust the parameters listed in the following table according to the control method This table lists only the most commonly used parameters Table 4 4 Adjusted parameters Name Parameter Factory Recom Performance Adjustment Method Number Setting Setting Reduce the setting if Controlling hunting torque is insufficient for Hunting prevention and vibration in mid heavy loads gain N1 02 dle range speeds 10 to 109 payee Increase the setting if hunt 40 Hz ing or vibration occurs for light loads Increase the setting if Reducing motor motor magnetic noise is Carrier frequency magnetic noise Depends high 0 to T selection Controlling hunting on capac default Reduce the settin
137. bjects to enter inside product Doing so may result in Caution fire and malfunction Do not apply any strong imact Doing so may result in damage to the product Caution di M ELS E or malfunction Inverter Installation Orientation and Space Install the Inverter vertically so as not to reduce the cooling effect When installing the Inverter always provide the following installation space to allow normal heat dissipation 120 mm min Horizontal Space Vertical Space Fig 1 9 Inverter Installation Orientation and Space AU 1 The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both Open Chassis IP00 and Enclosed Wall m mounted IP20 NEMA 1 Inverters e 2 Always remove the protection covers before installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 18 5 kW or less in a panel IMPORTANT Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a 200 or 400 V Class Inverter with an output of 22 KW or more in a panel 1 11 Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover Remove the terminal cover to wire cables to the control circuit and main circuit terminals Removing the Terminal Cover E Inverters of 18 5 kW or Less Loosen the screw at the bottom of the terminal cover press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the direc tions of arrows 1 and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow 2
138. capacity or if the motor is operated using the fac tory settings resulting in the motor stalling lower the value of L3 02 If using the motor in the parameter output range L3 02 will be automatically lowered to prevent stalling Set the parameters as a percentage taking the inverter rated current to be 100 Stall prevention level during acceleration L3 02 Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration L3 02 x L3 03 Stall Prevention Limit during Acceleration Output frequency E1 06 Base Frequency FA Fig 6 20 Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration 6 20 Acceleration Deceleration Characteristics Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration Stall Prevention During Decelera tion Function This function automatically lengthens the deceleration time with respect to the DC bus voltage to avoid over voltage tripping i Related Parameters Name E Description pe Number LCD Display etting Stall prevention selec 0 Disabled Motor decelerates according to setting When the tion during deceleration deceleration time is short there is a risk of DC bus overvol function selection tage 0V occurring 1 Enabled Prevents deceleration when DC bus voltage rea ches the overvoltage level Deceleration restarts after voltage has been restored 2 Optimum adjustment Minimizes deceleration judging from DC bus voltage The deceleration time setting is ignored StallP Decel Sel I
139. ch S1 and Shunt Connector CN15 The functions of DIP switch S1 are shown in the following table Table 2 10 DIP Switch S1 Seting RS 485 and RS 422 terminating resis OFF No terminating resistance tance ON Terminating resistance of 110 OFF 0 to 10 V internal resistance 20 ON 4 to 20 mA internal resistance 250 Input method for analog input A2 B Sinking Sourcing Mode The input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode 0 V common and sourcing mode 24V common by using the terminals SN SC and SP An external power supply is also supported providing more freedom in signal input methods 2 25 2 26 _ Table 2 11 Sinking Sourcing Mode and Input Signals Internal Power Supply Sinking Mode IP24V 24V External Power Supply Sinking Mode 52 SN External 24V e sp T IP24V 24V Internal Power Supply Sourcing Mode IP24V 24V External Power Supply Sourcing Mode External 24V Wiring Control Circuit Terminals Control Circuit Terminal Connections Connections to Inverter control circuit terminals are shown in Fig 2 19 Forward Run Stop Reverse Run Stop External fault Fault reset Multi function contact inputs Multi step speed setting 1 Multi function analog Multi step speed output 1 setting 2 Jog frequency selection Multi function a
140. city of both the motor and the inverter mEmergency Stop Although the Inverter s protective functions will stop operation when a fault occurs the motor will not stop immediately Always provide mechanical stop and protection mechanisms on equipment requiring an emer gency stop B Options Terminals 1 2 3 are for connecting only the options specifically provided by OMRON Never connect any other devices to these terminals 10 2 Inverter Application Precautions Installation Observe the following precautions when installing an Inverter installation in Enclosures Either install the Inverter in a clean location not subject to oil mist air bourne matter dust and other contami nants or install the Inverter in a completely enclosed panel Provide cooling measures and sufficient panel space so that the temperature surrounding the Inverter does not go beyond the allowable temperature Do not install the Inverter on wood or other combustible materials iinstallation Direction Mount the Inverter vertically to a wall or other vertical surface Settings Observe the following precautions when making settings for an Inverter mUpper Limits The Digital Operator can be used to set high speed operation up to a maximum of 120 Hz Incorrect settings can be dangerous Use the maximum frequency setting functions to set upper limits The maximum output frequency is factory set to 50 Hz EDC Injection Braking
141. communications using CRC 16 Perform calculations using the following method 1 The factory setting for CRC 16 communications is usually 0 but when using the RS 422A 485 system set the factory setting to 1 i e set all 16 bits to 1 2 Calculate CRC 16 using MSB as slave address LSB and LSB as the MSB of the final data 3 Also calculate CRC 16 for response messages from the slaves and compare them to the CRC 16 in the response messages 6 55 BRS 422A 485 Message Example An example of RS 422A 485 command response messages is given below Reading Storage Register Contents Read the contents of the storage register only for specified quantities The addresses must be consecutive starting from a specified address The data content of the storage register are separated into higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits The following table shows message examples when reading status signals error details data link status and frequency references from the slave 2 Inverter Response Message Response Message command Message During Normal Operation During Error Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Function Code 03H Function Code 03H Function Code 83H Start Number of attached Address Higher 00H data bytes 08H Error code 03H Register b Lower 20H Higher 00H Higher FIH Quantity Higher 00 dar Lower 65H Lower 31H 10 Max
142. ction Operator M O P When the frequency reference is set on the Digital Operator fre quency reference monitor sets whether the Enter Key is neces sary 0 Enter Key needed 1 Enter Key not needed When set to 1 the Inverter accepts the frequency reference without Enter Key operation Operation selection when digital operator is disconnected Oper Detec tion Sets the operation when the Digi tal Operator is disconnected 0 Disabled Operation continues even if the Digital Operator is disconnected 1 Enabled OPR is detected at Digital Operator disconnec tion Inverter output is cut off and fault contact is operated Cumulative operation time setting Elapsed Time Set Sets the cumulative operation time in hour units Operation time is calculated from the set values 5 99 5 422 Setting Factory Access 485 Description Range Setting Level Register Cumulative Cumulative time when the operation time selection Inverter power is on All time while the Inverter power is on is accumulated ae Time 1 Cumulative Inverter run time un Only Inverter output time is accumulated Initialize M alize Moue European specification Init Mode Sel 5 PV E specification Fan operation Set the initial value of the fan time setting operation time Fan ON Time The operation time accumulat
143. ctions SL 1 Separate the communications cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables P 2 Use shielded cables for the communications cables and use proper shield clamps 3 When using RS 485 communications connect S to R and S to R on the Inverter exterior See pic ture IMPORTANT for Communicating with the PLC Use the following procedure to perform communications with the PLC Turn OFF the power supply and connect the communications cable between the PLC and the Inverter Turn ON the power supply Set the required communications parameters H5 01 to H5 07 using the Digital Operator Turn OFF the power supply and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared Turn ON the power supply once again QU eet abu Perform communications with the PLC 6 53 Related Parameters Nam Param Description Number LCD Display Setting Factory Range Setting Reference selection Set the frequency reference input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal analog input 2 RS 422A 485 communications Reference Source 3 Option Card Operation method selection Set the run command input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal sequence input 2 RS 422A 485 communications RunSource 3 Option Card Slave address Set the Inverter station address hex Serial Comm Adr Set
144. current ov 10V OV 4 mA 10 V 20 mA Terminal A1 input Terminal A2 input 03 3 11 j Fig 6 22 Terminals Al and A2 Inputs e 22 Adjusting Frequency References E Adjusting Frequency Gain Using an Analog Input When H3 09 is set to 1 frequency gain you can adjust the frequency gain using an analog input Frequency gain 100 Multi function analog input terminal A2 input level 0V 4mA 10 V 20 mA Fig 6 23 Frequency Gain Adjustment Terminal A2 Input The frequency gain for terminal 1 is the sum of H3 02 and terminal A2 gain For example when H3 02 is set to 100 and terminal A2 is set to 5 V the terminal A1 frequency reference will be 50 Frequency reference 100 H3 02 50 H3 02 x 0 5 terminal A1 input voltage 0 10 V E Adjusting Frequency Bias Using an Analog Input When parameter H3 09 is set to 0 add to terminal A1 the frequency equivalent to the terminal A2 input volt age is added to A1 as a bias Frequency bias 100 i Multi function analog input terminal A2 input level OV 4 mA 10 V 20 mA Fig 6 24 Frequency Bias Adjustment Terminal A2 Input For example if H3 02 is 10096 H3 03 is 0 and terminal A2 is set to 1 V the frequency reference from terminal Al when 0 V is input to Al will be 10 6 23 Frequency reference H3 02 10 Bias Terminal A1 input voltage 0v 10V Operation Avoiding Resonance Jump Frequency
145. ds Front panel display IP51 Case IP20 Terminal section IPOO Memory Protection Non volatile memory IP51 requires that the optional K32 L49SC Drop proof Cover is used The protective structure is IP50 without it Options and Peripheral Devices Wiring Example A wiring example for a Scaling Meter is shown below 3 phase power supply Dimensions The dimensions of a Scaling Meter are given below 45 4 92 3 75 min 120 min Recommended panel cutout dimensions 48 43 1 14 2 mm 96 66 7 8 mm 3 5 Display LED size weight 200 g 9 11 E Analog Operators Standard with Steel Panels or Small in Plastic An Analog Operator allows frequency reference settings and ON OFF operation control to be performed by analog references from a remote location 50 m max 3G3IV PJVOP96 c 3G3IV PUVOP95 Analog Operator Analog Operator Models and Application The standard models of Analog Operators are listed in the following table Model No UNS Specifications 3G3IV PJVOP961 DCF 6A 3 V 1 mA 75 Hz 3G3IV PJVOP962 DCF 6A 3 V 1 mA 150 Hz 3G3IV PJVOP963 DCF 6A 3 V 1 mA 220 Hz 3G3IV PJVOP951 TRM 45 3 V 1 mA 60 120 Hz 3G3IV PJVOP952 TRM 45 3 V 1 mA 60 120 Hz Dimensions The dimensions of an Analog Operator are given below Front panel mounting space A 250 sn
146. e 50 to 130 OH Pre Alarm Lvl Inverter overheat OH pre Sets the operation for when the Inverter overheat pre alarm operation selection alarm goes ON 0 Decelerate to stop in deceleration time C1 02 1 Coast to stop 2 Fast stop in fast stop time C1 09 3 Continue operation Monitor display only OH Pre Alarm Sel A fault will be given in setting O to 2 and a minor fault will be given in setting 3 Input Terminal Functions Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operator and Control Circuit Terminals You can switch the Inverter run command inputs and frequency reference inputs between local i e Digital Operator and remote input method using b1 01 and b1 02 You can switch between local and remote by turning ON and OFF the terminals if an input from H1 01 to H1 05 multi function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection has been set to 1 local remote selec tion To set the control circuit terminals to remote set b1 01 and b1 02 to 1 Control circuit terminals B Related Parameters Nam Param eter Description Number Setting Factory LCD Display Range Setting Reference selection Set the frequency reference input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal analog input 2 RS 422A 485 communications Reference Source 3 Option Card Operation method selection Set the run command input method 0 Digital
147. e maximum applicable motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity increase the set value Ifthe motor is vibrating reduce the set value Adjust this parameter so that the output current during low speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter rated out put current range 0 00 to 2 50 Torq Comp Gain Torque compensation Set the primary delay for the torque compensation function primary delay time in ms Normally there is no need to make this setting Adjust this 0 to parameter in the following circumstances 10000 Torq Comp Time Ifthe motor is vibrating increase the set value Ifthe motor response is low decrease the set value E Adjusting Torque Compensation Gain Normally there is no need to make this adjustment Adjust the torque compensation gain under the following circumstances If the cable is very long increase the set value If the maximum applicable motor capacity is smaller than the Inverter capacity increase the set value f the motor is vibrating reduce the set value Adjust this parameter so that the output current during low speed rotation does not exceed the Inverter s rated output current range E Adjusting the Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time parameter Set the torque compensation function primary delay in ms Normally there is no need to make this setting Adjust the parameter as shown below If the motor is vibrating increase the set value
148. e param eters using the specified method Initialize 0 No initializing 1110 Initializes using the Parameters Init 2220 Initializes using a Parameters two wire sequence Initializes to the factory setting 3330 Initializes using a three wire sequence Password input when a pass Password word has been set in A1 05 This function write protects some parameters of the ini tialize mode If the password is changed T A1 01 to A1 03 parameters can no longer be changed Programming mode param eters can be changed 5 8 Application Parameters b The following settings are made with the application parameters B parameters Operation Method Selection DC injection braking speed searching timer functions dwell functions and energy saving functions Mode Selections b1 Param eter Number Name LCD Display Reference selection Reference Source Description Set the frequency reference input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal analog input 2 RS 422A 485 communi cations 3 Option Card Setting Range Factory Setting RS 422A 485 Register Operation method selec tion Run Source Set the run command input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal sequence input 2 RS 422A 485 communi cations 3 Option Card Stopping method sel
149. e switch S1 on the control panel Term A2 Sig nal Multi function analog input i terminal 2 Select multi function analog function selec input function for terminal A2 Hon Refer to the next table Terminal A2 Sel oe Sets the input gain level when terminal 14 is 10 V 20 mA Temna AD Set according to the 100 value Gain for the function set for H3 09 100 096 Bias ae Sets the input gain level when terminal 14 is 0 V 4 mA Set according to the 100 value Bias for the function set for H3 09 Terminal 1 Use terminal Al analog input A2 switching as main speed frequency refe rence T A1 A2 1 Use terminal A2 analog input Select as main speed frequency refe rence Effective when H3 09 is set to 2 5 22 H3 09 Settings Function Frequency bias Add to terminal 1 Contents 100 Maximum output frequency Parameter Tables Auxiliary frequency reference 2nd step analog Maximum output frequency PI feedback Maximum output frequency Motor temperature input 10 V 100 Analog input not used 5 23 E Multi function Analog Outputs H4 Name i RS 422A Description Setting Factory Access he LCD Dispay Range Setting Level Register Monitor selec Sets the number of the monitor tion item to be output 01 00 from terminal FM Terminal FM 10 to 14 28 34 39 40
150. e volt age Base volt age 1 These are values for a 200 V Class Inverter Values for a 400 V Class Inverter are double 2 El 11 and 1 12 are disregarded when set to 0 0 3 1 13 is set to the same value as 1 05 by autotuning Motor Setup E2 Param eter Number Name LCD Display Motor rated current Motor Rated FLA Description Sets the motor rated current These set values will become the reference values for motor pro tection torque limits and torque control This parameter is an input data for autotuning Setting Range Factory Setting Parameter Tables RS 422A 485 Register Motor line to line resistance Term Resistance Sets the motor phase to phase resistance in Q units This parameter is automatically set during autotuning 1 The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given 2 The setting range is 10 to 200 of the Inverter s rated output current The value for a 200 V class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given Option Parameters F il Communications Option Cards F6 Param eter Number Name LCD Display DeviceNet fault opera tion selection Comm Bus FIt Sel Description Set the stopping method for com munications errors 0 Deceleration to stop using decele
151. eat generation The ambient temperature should not be too high The output current value shown on the monitor displays should not be higher than normal The cooling fan on the bottom of the Inverter should be operating normally Periodic Inspection Check the following items during periodic maintenance Always turn OFF the power supply before beginning inspection Confirm that the LED indicators on the front cover have all turned OFF and then wait until at least five minutes have elapsed before beginning the inspec tion Be sure not to touch terminals right after the power has been turned off Doing so can result in electric shock External terminals mounting bolts connec tors etc Table 8 1 Periodic Inspections Inspection Are all screws and bolts tight Corrective Procedure Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly Are connectors tight Reconnect the loose connectors Cooling fins Are the fins dirty or dusty Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 39 2 x 10 to 58 8 x 10 Pa 4 to 6 kgecm Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the PCBs Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 39 2 x 10 to 58 8 x 10 Pa 4 to 6 kgecm2 Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean Cooling fan Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or has the total operating time exceeded 20 000 hours Replace the cooli
152. eblock commands during operation as this may cause the motor to suddenly start coasting and and may result the motor falling slipping Always use base block command when a contactor between inverter and motor is installed IMPORTANT Hold Analog Frequency Using User set Timing When one of H1 01 to H1 05 multi function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection is set to 1E sample hold analog frequency command the analog frequency reference will be held from 100 ms after the terminal is turned ON and and operation will continue thereafter at that frequency The analog value 100 ms after the command is turned ON is used as the frequency reference ON ON ON Sample hold command 100 4 9 100 p 1004 msec msec imsec Analog input A Frequency reference Fig 6 36 Sample Hold Analog Frequency B Application Precautions When setting and executing sample and hold for analog frequency references observe the following precau tions When performing sample hold of analog frequency reference be sure to store reference for 100 ms mini mum If the sample hold time is less than 100 ms the frequency reference will not be held The analog frequency reference that is held will be deleted when the power supply is turned OFF 6 4 6 48 Switching Operations between a Communications Option Card and Control Cir cuit Terminals You can switch frequency reference input between
153. ec tion Stopping Method Used to set the stopping method used when a stop command is input 0 Ramp to stop 1 Coast to stop 2 DC injection braking stop Stops faster than coast to Stop no regenerative ope ration 3 Coast to stop with timer Run commands are dis regarded during decelera tion Operation selection after Switching to remote mode LOC REM RUN Sel Used to set the operation mode by switching to the Remote mode using the Local Remote Key 0 Run signals that are input during mode switching are disregarded Input Run signals after swit ching the mode Run signals become effective immediately after switching to the Remote mode Run com mand selec tion in programming modes RUN CMD at PRG Used to set an operation interlock in programming modes 0 Cannot operate 1 Can operate Disabled when Digital Operator is set to select run command when b1 02 0 LCD Display Zero speed level DC injection brak ing starting frequency DCInj Start Freq BDC Injection Braking b2 Description Used to set the frequency at which DC injection braking starts in units of Hz when deceleration to stop is selected When b2 01 is less than 1 09 E1 09 becomes the DC injection braking starting frequency Setting Range Factory Setting Access Level RS 422A 485Regist er Parameter Tables
154. ective and Diagnostic Functions If Parameters Cannot Be Set Use the following information if an Inverter parameter cannot be set mThe display does not change when the Increment and Decrement Keys are pressed The following causes are possible The Inverter is operating drive mode There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation Turn the Inverter off and then make the set tings Parameter write enable is input This occurs when parameter write enable set value 1B is set for a multi function input terminal H1 01 to H1 05 If the parameter write enable input is OFF the parameters cannot be changed Turn it ON and then set the parameters Passwords do not match Only when a password is set If the parameter A1 04 Password and A1 05 Password Setting numbers are different the parameters for the initialize mode cannot be changed Reset the password If you cannot remember the password display A1 05 Password Setting by pressing the Reset Select Key and the Menu Key simultaneously while in the A1 04 display Then reset the password Input the reset password in parameter A1 04 BOPEO01 through OPE11 is displayed The set value for the parameter is wrong Refer to Operation Errors in this chapter and correct the setting CPFOO or CPF01 is displayed This is a Digital Operator communications error The connection between the Digital Operator and the Inverter may be faulty Remove the Digit
155. eedback commandTossdeiectiontime 0 BS 15_ PIsleepTinotion 5SI6 PIsleep operation deyme SSCS Sd 55 17 AccelerationWdeceleration ime Tor Preeren 9 BRUT Energysavingmode selection 001 BROT BROS Power detection erine 29 E06 Search operation voltage Tinley JAweem m me CSO CIUS Accelerationtime2 199 PCO Fast StopTime C Accede swich teang 001 COUT S curve characteristic time at accelerations on Torque compensationtime 001 Td 3597 C505 Canier Freq Proportional Gaim 9 Table 10 1 Parameters Continued No Setting 100 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 dl 17 Jog frequency reference d2 01 42 02 42 03 43 01 43 02 43 03 43 04 16 01 16 02 1 01 03 04 1 05 1 06 07 1 08 1 09 1 10 1 11 1 12 1 13 2 01 2 05 F6 01 F6 02 F6 03 F6 05 HI 01 H1 02 H1 03 H1 04 H1 05 H2 01 H2 02 H3 02 H3 03 H3 08 H3 09 H3 10 H3 11 H3 13 H4 01 H4 02 H4 03 1 4 04 Monitor selection terminal AM H4 05 1
156. en Inverter and motor is large approx 150 m min A large torque is required at startup ele vator loads etc An AC reactor is inserted in the Inverter input or output You are operating a motor that is less than optimum 50 Hz specifications medium startup torque 50 Hz specifications large startup torque 60 Hz specifications medium startup torque 60 Hz specifications large startup torque Fixed Output Operation This pattern is used for frequencies of 60 Hz or higher A fixed voltage is applied 90 Hz specifications voltage saturation at 60 Hz 120 Hz specifications voltage saturation at 60 Hz The torque is protected by the fully automatic torque boost function so normally there is no need to use this pattern When you select these patterns the values of parameters E1 04 to E1 10 are changed automatically There are three types of values for E1 04 to E1 10 depending on the Inverter capacity 0 4 to 1 5 kW V f pattern 2 2 to 45 kW V f pattern 55 to 160 kW V f pattern The characteristics diagrams for each are shown in the following pages 6 75 0 4 to 1 5 kW V f Pattern The diagrams show characteristics for a 200 V class motor For a 400 V class motor multiply all voltages by 2 Parameter Torque Characteristics Set Value 0 to 3 Set Value 1 Set Value 2 Set Value 3 50 60 Hz 60 72 Hz Decrement Torque Characteristics Set Value 4 t
157. ence Monitors U1 01 Output fre quency Monitors U1 02 Output voltage reference U1 06 Output current U1 03 Output power U1 08 Not used Not used Not used Sequence input status Bit 0 Multi function contact input terminal S1 1 Bit 1 Multi function contact input terminal S2 1 Bit2 Multi function contact input terminal S3 1 Bit 3 Multi function contact input terminal S4 1 Bit4 Multi function contact input terminal S5 1 Bit 5 Multi function contact input terminal S6 1 Bit 6 Multi function contact input terminal S7 1 Bits 7 to F Not used Individual Functions Register No Contents Inverter status Bit 0 Operation 1 Operating Bit 1 Zero speed 1 Zero speed Bit 2 Frequency matching 1 Matched Bit 3 User defined speed matching 1 Matched Bit 4 Frequency detection 1 1 Output frequency lt L4 01 Bit 5 Frequency detection 2 Output frequency 2 14 01 Bit 6 Inverter startup completed 1 Startup completed Bit 7 Low voltage detection 1 Detected Bit 8 Baseblock Inverter output baseblock Bit 9 Frequency reference mode Not communication 0 Communication Bit A Run command mode Not communication 0 Communication Bit B Overtorque detection Detected Bit C Frequency reference lost Lost Bit D Retrying error Retrying BitE Error including RS 422A 485 commu
158. ent 0 to D F Frequency refer ences 1 to 4 and jog frequency ref erence d1 01 to d1 04 and 41 17 Set the required speed references for multi step speed operation or jogging 0 to 120 00 Hz d1 01 to 41 04 0 00 Hz 41 17 6 00 Hz Input voltage set ting Set the Inverter s nominal input voltage in volts 155 to 255 V 200 V class 310 to 510 V 400 V class 200 V 200 V class 400 V 400 V class Trial Operation Procedures Table 4 1 Parameters that must be set Continued Class 1 Must be set Set as required Parame ter Num Description ber Setting Factory Range Setting Setting for general 10 to 200 purpose Set the motor rated current of Inverter s motor of rated current same capacity as Inverter Motor rated cur rent 4 02 FM and AM ter Adjust when an instrument is connected 0 00 to 2 50 1 00 minal output gain to the FM or AM terminal TR H4 05 0 50 Set to enable or disable the motor over load protection function using the elec tronic thermal relay 0 Disabled 1 General motor protection Motor protection selection If using the dynamic brake option Brak ing Resistor Units and Braking Units be sure to set parameter L3 04 to 0 dis abled Stall prevention selection during deceleration Selecting the V f pattern Set either one of the fixed patterns 0 to D in E1 03 V
159. ent after freq refer If L4 05 is set to 1 and the reference is lost inverter will ence loss run at fout L4 06 fref EZ at Floss before lossing Restarting Operation After Transient Error Auto Restart Function If an Inverter error occurs during operation the Inverter will perform self diagnosis If no error is detected the Inverter will automatically restart This is called the auto restart function Set the number of auto restarts in parameter L5 01 The auto restart function can be applied to the following errors If an error not listed below occurs the protec tion function will operate and the auto restart function will not work OC Overcurrent LF Output phase failure GF Ground fault OLI Motor overload PUF Fuse blown OL2 Inverter overload OV Main circuit overvoltage OHI Motor overheat UVI Main Circuit Undervoltage Main Circuit MC Operation Failure OL3 Overtorque PF Main circuit voltage fault When L2 01 is set to 1 or 2 continue operation during momentary power loss Bl Auto Restart External Outputs To output auto restart signals externally set H2 01 or H2 02 multi function contact output terminals M1 M2 and M3 MA function selection to 1E auto restart 6 43 BRelated Parameters Nam Param Description Number Setting Factory LCD Display Range Setting Number of auto restart Set the number of auto restarts attemp
160. ent speed reference Motor Costant Parameters E E V f Pattern E1 Name i RS 422A Description Setting Factory Access ius LCD Diplay Range Setting Level Register Input volt age setting Input Volt Sets the Inverter input voltage This setting is used as a reference age value in protection functions V F pattern O to D Select from the 14 preset selection patterns Custom user set patterns Selection Applicable for settings 1 04 to E1 10 Max output frequency Max Frequency Max volt age Output voltage V Max volt WAX age 1 13 Base fre quency E1 08 Base fre INS Et 10 q u ency FMIN FB FA FHAK E1 09 E1 07 _ E1 06 E1 04 Frequency Hz Mid output frequency Mid Fre To set V f characteristics in a quency A straight line set the same values piso for E1 07 and E1 09 In this case valede the setting for E1 08 will be disre Mid Volt garded age A Always ensure that the four fre quencies are set in the following Min output frequency Manner Min Fre E1 04 FMAX 2 E1 06 FA gt quency E1 07 FB 2 E1 09 FMIN Min output frequency voltage Min Voltage Mid output frequency 2 Mid Fre quency B Mid output frequency Set only to fine adjust V f for the voltage 2 output range Normally this setting Mid vorage is not required Bas
161. ention L3 Parame ter Number Name LCD Display Stall preven tion selection during accel StallP Accel Sel Description 0 Disabled Acceleration as set With a heavy load the motor may stall Enabled Acceleration stop ped when L3 02 level is excee ded Acceleration starts again when the current is returned Intelligent acceleration mode Using the L3 02 level as a basis acceleration is automati cally adjusted Set accelera tion time is disregarded Setting Range Factory Setting RS 422A 485 Register Stall preven tion level dur ing accel StallP Accel Lvl Effective when L3 01 is set to 1 or Set as a percentage of Inverter rated current Usually changing this setting is not necessary The factory setting reduces the set values when the motor stalls 0 to 200 Stall preven tion selection during decel StallP Decel Sel 0 Disabled Deceleration as set If deceleration time is too short a DC Bus overvoltage may result Enabled Deceleration is stop ped when the DC Bus voltage exceeds the overvoltage level Deceleration restarts when voltage is returned Intelligent deceleration mode Deceleration rate is automati cally adjusted so that in Inver ter can decelerate in the shortest possible time Set deceleration time is disregar ded When a braking option Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit is used always set to 0 Stall pre
162. equency reference quency refer 0 0 to enceloss Value when the frequency refer 100 0 ence is missing Fref at Floss B Fault Restart L5 Name Change Description Setting Factory during Access Page Number LCD Display Range Setting Opera Level E tion Number of auto restart Sets the number of auto restart attempts attempts Automatically restarts after a fault and conducts a speed search from the run frequency Num of Restarts Auto restar Sets whether a fault contact out operation 1 selection put is activated during fault restart 0 No output Fault contact is not Restart Sel activated 1 Output Fault contact is acti vated 5 29 B Torque Detection L6 Nam Parame ame pE 5 422 LCD Description Setting Factory 485 Range Setting Number Display Register 0 Overtorque undertorque detec Torque detec tion disabled aj Overtorque detection only with speed agreement opera tion continues after overtorque warning Overtorque detected conti nuously during operation ope ration continues after overtorque warning Overtorque detection only with speed agreement output stopped upon detection pro tected operation Overtorque detected conti nuously during operation out put stopped upon detection protected operation Undertorque detection only with speed agreement o
163. er double the values llSetting Precautions Error output signals are not output during momentary power loss recovery To continue Inverter operation after power has been restored make settings so that run commands from the control main circuit terminal are stored even while power is suspended If the momentary power loss operation selection is set to 0 Disabled when the momentary power loss exceeds 15 ms during operation alarm UV1 main circuit undervoltage will be detected 6 6 38 Speed Search B Related Parameters Name LCD Display Speed search selection current detection or Speed calculation Slip Comp Gain Description Enables disables the speed search function for the RUN com mand and sets the speed search method 0 Disabled speed calculation 1 Enabled speed calculation 2 Disabled current detection 3 Enabled current detection Speed Calculation When the search is started the motor speed is calculated and acceleration deceleration is performed from the calculated speed to the specified frequency motor direction is also sear ched Current Detection The speed search is started from the frequency when power was momentarily lost or the maximum frequency and the speed is detected when the set search current level is reached Setting Range Factory Setting The speed search function finds the actual speed of a motor that is coasting without control and then starts
164. er E2 01 for motor 1 i Motor Overload Protection Characteristics Set the overload protection function L1 01 according to the applicable motor The following table shows the motor type and tolerance load characteristics 6 33 Electronic Thermal Motor Type Tolerance Load Characteristics Cooling Ability Operation at 100 Motor Load Short time 60s Rated rotation speed 100 speed 3 7 kW 5510 15 KW V Use this motor for pig min operations using lt 18096 ED r Frame number Max LN SD min speed o 00 LJ min commercial power 50 E or 30 mins supply This motor construction yields best cooling effect 200 Lj space a OR i 20014 Speed when operating at 50 Reus 60 Hz 132 MJ When operating continu ously at 50 60 Hz or less motor overload detection OL1 is detected The Inverter outputs the error contact and the motor coasts to a stop General purpose motor standard motor 0110 33 50 100 120 167 200 Rotation speed 96 Setting Motor Protection Operation Time Set the motor protection operation time in L1 02 If after operating the motor continuously at the rated current a 120 overload is experienced set the hot start electronic thermal protection operation time The factory setting is resistance to 120 for 60 seconds The following diagram shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation time L1 0
165. er control method in which you are trying to copy and the Inverter control method stored in the Digital Operator are different Comparison between the parameter written to the Inverter and the parameter in the Digital Operator are different 6 84 After copying has ended the checksum between the sum value of the Inverter parameter and the sum value of the Digital Operator parameter are different Digital Operator Functions Comparing Inverter Parameters and Digital Operator Parameter Set Values VERIFY To compare Inverter parameters and Digital Operator parameter set values make the settings using the follow ing method Table 6 4 VERIFY Function Procedure Digital Operator Display Explanation Press the MENU key and select advanced pro gramming mode DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE Press the ENTER key and select the parameters monitor display e Display 03 01 Copy Function Selection using eoo the Increment key and Decrement key DRE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE L Li Press the ENTER key and select the function eo gt setting display DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY Change the set value to 3 using the Increment key Set the changed data using the ENTER key The VERIFY function will start QUICK ADV VERIFY If the VERIFY function ends normally End is End Tio displayed on the Digital Operator Parameter je 03 01 is a
166. er vibration suppression dis able the hunting prevention func tion Setting Range Factory Setting Access Level RS 422A 485 Register BHigh slip Braking Hunting pre vention gain Hunt Prev Gain Name LCD Display High slip brak ing decelera tion frequency width HSB Decel Width Set the hunting prevention gain multiplication factor Normally there is no need to change this setting Make the adjustments as follows If vibration occurs with light load increase the setting f the motor stalls reduce the setting If the setting is to large the volt age will be to suppressed and the motor may stall Description Sets the frequency width for deceleration during high slip braking in percent taking the Maximum Frequency E1 04 as 100 Setting Range Factory Setting Access Level RS 422A 485 Register High slip brak ing current limit HSB Current Ref Sets the current limit for decelera tion during high slip braking in percent taking the motor rated current as 100 The resulting limit must be 150 of the Inverter rated current or less Parameter Tables Name 1 5 422 Setting Factory Access LCD Description R revel 485 Display ange Setting eve Register High slip brak ing stop dwell Sets the dwell time for the output time frequency for FMIN 1 5 Hz dur
167. er wires at 75 C 2 10 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Table 2 3 Closed loop Connector Sizes JIS C2805 200 V Class and 400 V Class Wr Tickness m 1 25 to 3 5 1 25 to 4 1 25 to 3 5 1 25 to 4 1 25 to 3 5 1 25 to 4 2to 3 5 2to4 2to5 2to6 2to8 5 5to4 5 5 0 5 5 5 to 6 5 5 to 8 8to5 8to6 8to8 14 to6 14 to 8 22t06 22 to 8 38 to 8 60 to 8 60 to 10 80 to 10 100 to 10 100 to 12 150 to 12 200 to 12 325 to 12 325 to 16 v Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2 of the rated voltage Line x voltage drop is calculated as follows Line voltage drop V J 3 x wire resistance W km x wire length m x current A x 103 IMPORTANT 2 11 2 12 Main Circuit Terminal Functions Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according to terminal symbols in Table 2 4 Wire the termi nals correctly for the desired purposes Table 2 4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions 200 V Class and 400 V Class Main circuit power input R L1 S L2 T L3 Model 3G3PV A2004 E to A2900 E 200 V Class 400 V Class A4004 E to A416K E B2220 E to B211K E B4220 E to B416K E RI L11 S1 L21 T1 L31 A2220 E to A2900 E A4220 E to A416K E B2220 E to B211K E B4220 E to
168. erated by the Inverter or when the power supply capacity is greatly larger than the Inverter s capacity Also used to increase the power factor Simple Input Noise Filter 3G3EV PLNFDLI Reduces noise coming into the inverter from the power supply line and to reduce noise flowing from the inverter into the power supply line Connected to the power supply input side Input Noise Filter Schaffner 3G3IV PFNLI Reduces noise coming into the inverter from the power supply line and to reduce noise flowing from the inverter into the power supply line Connected to the power supply input side Input Noise Filter Schaffner for EMC Directive 3G3RV PFILI SE Required for the 3G3PV Inverter to meet the EMC Directive Input Noise Filter Rasmi for EMC Direc tive 3G3RV PFILI E Required for the 3G3PV Inverter to meet the EMC Directive Output Noise Filter Tokin 3G3IV PLFLI Controls noise generated by the Inverter so it does not enter the power supply Con nected to the motor output side 1 Recommended Options can be ordered from OMRON using the above model numbers Options and Peripheral Devices Special Mounted Options The special mounted options are described in this section B Fan Unit Replacement fan for Inverters equipped with a cooling fan Replace the Cooling Fan when the fan replacement time has come or a cooling fan fault FAN alarm has been displayed Model
169. ermistor temperature to the resistance value Class F Class H Resistance Ohms 15956 Prin 1330 Tr Temperature threshold value Temperatue Tr 5 Tr 5 Fig 6 27 PTC Thermistor Temperature Resistance Value Characteristics 6 35 6 36 Operation during Motor Overheating Set the operation if the motor overheats in parameters L1 03 and L1 04 Set the motor temperature input filter time parameter in L1 05 If the motor overheats the OH3 and OH4 error codes will be displayed on the Digi tal Operator Error Codes If the Motor Overheats Inverter stops or continues to operate according to the setting in L1 03 Inverter stops according to the setting in L1 04 By setting H3 09 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A2 Function Selection to E Motor temperature input you can detect alarm OH3 or OH4 using the temperature resistance characteristics and protect the motor The terminal connections are shown in the following diagram i Multi function Mi Multi function contact input M2 contact output l L MA E QURSM pe Fault contact 15V 20mA output Branch resistance 1 18 M3 Multi function PHC output M4 A2 0 10V PTC thermistor 5 The resistance value of 18 kQ is only valid for using a 3 phase with the characteristic shown on the previous page Fig 6 28 Mutual Connections for Motor Overheating Protection Se
170. ers U parameters Setting parameters for monitor ing in drive mode B Status Monitor Parameters U1 Name LCD Display Frequency reference Frequency Ref Description Monitors sets the frequency ref erence value Output Signal Level During Multi Function Analog Output 10 V Max frequency 0 to 10 V possible Access Level RS 422A 485 Register Output fre quency Output Freq Monitors the output frequency 10 V Max frequency 0 to 10 V possible Output current Output Cur rent Monitors the output current 10 V Inverter rated output current 0 to 10 V absolute value output Output volt age Output Volt age Monitors the output voltage refer ence value in the Inverter 10 V 200 VAC 400 VAC 0 to 10 V output DC bus volt age DC Bus Volt age Monitors the main DC voltage in the Inverter 10 V 400 VDC 800 VDC Output power Output kWatts Monitors the output power inter nal detected value 10V Inverter maximum capacity max appli cable motor capacity 0 to 10 V possible Input terminal status Input Term Sts Shows input ON OFF status 11111177 1 FWD command 1 is ON 1 REV command S2 is ON 1 Multi input 1 L S3 is ON 1 Multi input 2 __ 54 is ON 1 Multi input 3 S5 is ON 1 Multi input 4 L S6 is ON 1 Multi input 5 S7 is ON
171. erter minstalling Reactors A large peak current will flow in the power input circuit when the Inverter is connected to a large capacity power transformer 600 kVA or higher or when switching a phase capacitor Excessive peak current can destroy the convertor section To prevent this install a DC or AC reactor optional to improve the power sup ply power factor DC reactors are built into 200 V class Inverters of 22 to 110 kW and 400 V class Inverters of 22 to 160 kW If a thyristor convertor such as a DC drive is connected in the same power supply system connect a DC or AC reactor regardless of the power supply conditions shown in the following diagram DC or AC reactor 4 Power supply Required capacity kVA 600 DC or AC reactor Not required 60 400 Inverter capacity kVA Fig 10 1 Binverter Capacity When connecting special motors or multiple motors in parallel to an Inverter select the Inverter capacity so that the rated output current of the Inverter is minimum 1 1 times the sum of all the motor rated currents initial Torque The startup and acceleration characteristics of the motor are restricted by the overload current ratings of the Inverter that is driving the motor The torque characteristics are generally less than those required when start ing using a normal commercial power supply If a large initial torque is required select an Inverter with a somewhat larger capacity or increase the capa
172. es pet from the set value Fault trace ini 0 Disable tialize EVA 1 Initialize 7 zero clear after FLT Trace Init Setting 1 02 12 will be returned to 0 This setting depends on the inverter capacity B Copy Function 03 Parameters for the copy function are shown in the following table Name RS 422A 485 Register Setting Factory Access LCD Description Range Setting Level Display Copy function selection 0 Normal operation 1 READ Inverter to Operator Copy Function 2 COPY Operator to Inverter Sel 3 Verify compare Read permis sion selection 0 Read prohibited Read Allow 1 Read permitted able T Motor Autotuning The following settings are made with the motor autotuning parameters T parameters Settings for autotuning Name RS 422A 485 Register Setting Factory Access LCD Description Range Setting Level Display Motor output power Set the output power of the motor in kilowatts Mtr Rated Power 5 36 LCD Display Motor rated current Rated Current Description Set the rated current of the motor in Amps Setting Factory Range Setting Access Level Parameter Tables RS 422A 485 Register U Monitor Parameters The following settings are made with the monitor paramet
173. esescsssseeessscscessseeenssceeeees 7 13 lf the Direction of the Motor Rotation is 7 14 if the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration Is 10 7 15 If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference 7 15 if Motor Deceleration Is Slow tnter tenis 7 15 If the Motor Overheats ccccccccsscssssssessesessssssecsssesscscsessssseecstsenecssseeesitsesesetseseseeseeaeaes 7 16 if peripheral devices are influenced by starting the 1 7 16 if the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter Is 7 17 If There Is Mechanical if the Motor Rotates Even When Inverter Output Is Stopped if 0 V Is Detected When the Fan Is Started or the Fan Stalls if Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference Maintenance and 871 Maintenance and Inspection mem 8 2 Daily Inspection 8 2 9 Periodic Inspection een c e rh inira ats 8 2 Periodic Maintenance of Parts tenente tnns 8 3 Cooling Fan Replacement Outline
174. eter Set the time parameter for output power detection 0 to 2000 20 ms kW Filter Time Search operation voltage limiter Set the limit value of the voltage control range during search operation Perform search operation to optimize operations using minute variations in voltage using energy saving control Set to 0 to disable the search operation 100 is the motor base voltage Search V Limit The same capacity as the Inverter will be set by initializing the parameters 2 The factory settings depend on the Inverter capacity E Adjusting Energy saving Control By the Energy Saving function the voltage for optimum motor efficiency is calculated and becomes the output voltage reference b8 04 Energy saving Coefficient is set at the factory for motor use applied to the Inverter If the motor capacity differs from the motor applied to the Inverter set the motor capacity in E2 11 Motor Rated Out put Also adjust b8 04 in steps of 5 until reaches it s minimum The larger the energy saving coefficient the greater the output voltage To improve response when the load fluctuates reduce the power detection filter time parameter b8 05 If b8 05 is set too small However motor rotations when the load is light may become unstable Motor efficiency varies due to temperature fluctuations and differences in motor characteristics Conse quently the motor efficiency has to be controlled To ha
175. etting 1 01 and A1 04 2 ADVANCED Acces Level Parameters can be read and set in both quick pro gramming mode and advanced programming A mode Setting a Password When a pasword is set in A1 05 if the set values in A1 04 and A1 05 do not match you can not refer or change the settings of parameters A1 01 to A1 03 You can prohibit the setting and referencing of all parameters except A1 00 by using the password function in combination with setting A1 01 to 0 Monitor only B Related Parameters Name me Factory D LCD Display esenpton Setting Used to set the parameter access level set read 0 Monitoring only Monitoring drive mode and setting A1 01 and A1 04 2 ADVANCED Parameters can be read and set in both quick pro gramming mode and advanced programming A mode Parameter access level Acces Level Password input when a password has been set in A1 05 This function write protects some parameters of the initial ize mode 0 to If the password is changed A1 01 to A1 03 parameters 9999 Enter Password can no longer be changed Programming mode parame ters can be changed Password Password setting Used to set a four digit number as the password This parameter is not usually displayed When the pass word A1 04 is displayed hold down the reset key and Select password press the Menu key and the password will be displayed 0 to 9999
176. f 5 steps using 4 frequency references and one jog frequency reference The following example of a multi function input terminal function shows a 9 step operation using multi step references 1 to 3 and jog frequency selection functions i Related Parameters To switch frequency references set multi step references 1 to 3 and the jog reference selection in the multi function contact inputs Multi function Contact Inputs H1 01 to H1 05 Parameter IIS Set Value Terminal Details Multi step speed command 1 Also used for master speed auxiliary speed switching when multi function analog input H3 09 is set to 2 auxiliary frequency reference Multi step speed command 2 Jog frequency selection given priority over multi step speed command Combining Multi Function References and Multi Function Contact Inputs You can change the selected frequency reference by combining the ON OFF status of S4 to S7 multi function contact input terminals to set multi step speed commands 1 to 3 and the jog frequency selection The follow ing table shows the possible combinations TerminalS5 Multi step Speed Com mand 2 TerminalS6 Multi step Speed Com mand 3 TerminalS7 Jog Fre quency Selec tion Selected Frequency Frequency reference 1 d1 01 master speed frequency Frequency reference 2 d1 02 auxiliary frequency Frequency reference 3 d1 03 Frequency reference 4 d1 04 Jo
177. f Pattern Selection or set F in E1 03 to specify a user set pattern as required for the motor and load characteristics in E1 04 to E1 13 in advanced program ming mode Simple operaton of a general pupose motor at 50 Hz E1 03 F default or 0 If E1 03 the default setting in the user setting from E1 04 to 1 13 are for 50 Hz Perform autotuning for the line to line resistance only if the motor cable is 50 m or longer for the actual installation or when the load causes stalling Autotuning for Line to Line Resistance Autotuning can be used to prevent control errors when the motor cable is long or the cable length has changed or when the motor and Inverter have different capacities To perform autotuning set parameters T1 02 and T1 04 and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operator The Inverter will supply power to the motor for approximately 20 seconds and the Motor Line to Line Resis tance E2 05 and cable resistance will be automatically measured x s IMPORTANT B Parameter Settings for Autotuning The following parameters must be set before autotuning Table 4 2 Parameter Settings before Autotuning Motor out put power Display Set the output power of the motor in Kilowatts Setting Range 10 to 20096 of Inverter rated output Power will be supplied to the motor when autotuning is performed even though the motor will not turn Do not touch the motor until autotuning has bee
178. f using the dynamic brake option Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units be sure to set parameter L3 04 to 0 Setting Example An example of stall prevention during deceleration when L3 04 is set to 1 as shown below Output frequency Deceleration time controlled to prevent overvoltage Time E m set value Fig 6 21 Stall Prevention During Deceleration Operation ll Setting Precautions The stall prevention level during deceleration differs depending on the inverter rated voltage and the input voltage Refer to the following table for details Inverter Rated Input Voltage Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration V 400 V class When using the braking option Braking Resistor Units and Braking Units be sure to set parameter L3 04 to 0 e 21 Adjusting Frequency References Adjusting Analog Frequency References Gain and bias are among the parameters used to adjust analog inputs B Related Parameters Name T Setting Factory LCD Display Range Setting Frequency reference volt age terminal A1 input gain Set the frequency during 10 V input as a percentage tak 0 0 to Term A1 Lvi Sel ing max output frequency to be 100 1000 0 Frequency reference volt 100 0 age terminal A1 input bias Set the frequency during 0 V input as a percentage taking max output frequency to be 100 100 0 to 100 0 Terminal A1 Bias
179. fault will be given in setting 3 Setting Range Factory Setting Access Level Parameter Tables RS 422A 485 Register Ground pro tection selec tion Ground Fault Sel 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Cooling fan control delay time Fan Delay Time Set the time in seconds to delay turning OFF the cooling fan after the cooling fan OFF command is received Ambient tem perature Ambient Temp Set the ambient temperature OL2 charac teristics selec tion at low speeds OL2 Sel L Spd 0 OL2 characteristics at low speeds disabled 1 OL2 characteristics at low speeds enabled Soft CLA selection Soft CLA Sel 0 Disabled gain 0 1 Enabled The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given 5 31 5 32 Special Adjustments The following settings are made with the special adjustments parameters n parameters Hunting prevention and speed feedback detection control Hunting Prevention Function n1 Param eter Number Name LCD Display Hunting pre vention func tion selection Hunt Prev Select Description 0 Hunting prevention function disabled 1 Hunting prevention function enabled The hunting prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load If high response has the priority ov
180. ference 1 Master auxiliary switch Auxiliary frequency ref erence when ON Multi step speed reference 24 Multi step setting 2 when ON Jog frequency reference Jog frequency when ON Functions are selected by set ting H1 01 to H1 05 24 VDC 8 mA Photo coupler isolation Sequence input common Analog input signals 15 V power output 15 V power supply for analog references 15 V Max current 20 mA 15 V power output not used 15 V Max current 20 mA Frequency reference 0 to 10 V 100 0 to 10 V 20 kQ Multi function analog input 4 to 20 mA 100 0 to 10 V 100 Function is selected by set ting H3 09 4 to 20 mA 250Q 0 to 10 V 20kQ Analog reference common Shield wire optional ground line connection point Se quence output signals Running signal 1NO contact Operating when ON Zero speed Zero level b2 01 or below when ON Multi function contact outputs Dry contacts Contact capacity 1 A max at 250 VAC 1 A max at 30 VDC Fault output signal SPDT Fault when CLOSED across MA and MC Fault when OPEN across MB and MC Dry contacts Contact capacity 1 A max at 250 VAC 1 A max at 30 VDC Analog output signals Multi function analog output frequency output 0 to 10 V 100 fre quency Multi function analog monitor Analog common copy Multi
181. following table Table 2 8 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes Wie Sze nme 0 8 2 0 25 24 AI 0 25 8YE 0 5 20 AI 0 5 83WH 1 1 25 0 75 18 AI 0 75 8GY 1 3 2 8 Phoenix Contact 1 25 16 AI 1 5 8BK 1 8 3 4 2 14 AI 2 5 8BU 4 2 Fig 2 16 Straight Solderless Terminal Sizes i Wiring Method Use the following procedure to connect wires to the terminal block 1 Loosen the terminal screws with a thin slot screwdriver 2 Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block 3 Tighten the terminal screws firmly Fd Thin slot screwdriver Blade of screwdriver Control circuit terminal block 200 Strip the end for 7 mm if no sold c un erless terminal f is used Solderless terminal or wire le 3 5 max without soldering Wires Blade thickness 0 6 mm max Fig 2 17 Connecting Wires to Terminal Block 2 23 Control Circuit Terminal Functions The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2 9 Use the appropriate terminals for the cor rect purposes Se quence input signals Table 2 9 Control Circuit Terminals Signal Name Signal Level Forward run when ON stopped when OFF Forward run stop command Reverse run stop command Reverse run when ON stopped when OFF External fault input Fault when ON Fault reset Reset when ON Multi step speed re
182. fully handle the Inverter because it uses semiconductor elements Careless handling may result in malfunction Caution Do not exchange wiring the Operator optional cover disconnect connectors or replace fans while power is being supplied Doing so may result in injury damage to the product or malfunction Warning Information and Position Warning Information and Position There is warning information on the Inverter in the positon shown in the following illustration Aways read the warnings Warning information position Warning information position Illustration shows the 3G3PV A2004 E Illustration shows the 3G3PV B2220 E Warning information ZX WARNING A Risk of electric shock Read manual before installing Wait 5 minutes for capacitor discharge after disconnecting power supply NAVERTIS SEMENT A Risque de d charge lectrique Lire le manual avant l installation Attendre 5 minutes apr s la coupure de l allmentation Pour permettre la d charge des condensateurs MI Registered Trademarks The following registered trademarks are used in this manual DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA Open DeviceNet Vendors Association Inc MODBUS is a trademark of the AEG Schneider Automation Inc M Contents 1 Handling Inverters iere inve diea i a 1 1 5
183. g 1 1 Nameplate Confirmations upon Delivery BInverter Model Numbers The model number of the Inverter on the nameplate indicates the specification voltage class and maximum motor capacity of the Inverter in alphanumeric codes G3PV A 2037 E Specifications E European Model Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity 004 0 4kW 055 5 5 kW 220 22kW 750 75 kW 007 0 75 kW 075 7 5 kW 300 30kW 900 90 kW 015 15kW 110 11 kW 370 37kW 11K 110 kW 022 2 2kW 150 15 kW 450 45kW 13K 130 kW 037 3 7kW 185 18 5 kW 550 55 kW 16K 160 kW 040 4 0 kW Voltage Class 2 AC input 3 phase 200 V 200 V Class 4 AC input 3 phase 400 V 400 V Class Installation type A Panel mounting or closed wall mounting IEC IP20 NEMA 1 B Open Chassis IEC IP00 Series Name 3G3PV Series Fig 1 2 Inverter Model Numbers Open Chassis Type IEC IP00 2 Protected so that parts of the human body cannot reach electrically charged parts from the front when the Inverter is mounted in a control panel TERMS Enclosed Wall mounted IEC IP20 NEMA Type 1 The Inverter is structured so that the Inverter is shielded from the exterior and can thus be mounted to the interior wall of a standard building not necessarily enclosed in a control panel The protective structure con forms to the standards
184. g frequency 41 17 Terminal S7 s jog frequency selection is given priority over multi step speed commands Setting Precautions When setting analog inputs to step 1 and step 2 observe the following precautions When setting terminal Al s analog input to step 1 set b1 01 to 1 and when setting 11 01 Frequency Ref erence 1 to step 1 set b1 01 to 0 When setting terminal A2 s analog input to step 2 set H3 09 to 2 auxiliary frequency reference When setting d1 02 Frequency Reference 2 to step 2 set H3 09 to 1F do not use analog inputs Frequency Reference il Connection Example and Time Chart The following diagram shows a time chart and control circuit terminal connection example during a 5 step operation Inverter Forward stop Reverse stop Error reset Fault Reset Multi step reference 1 Multi step reference 2 Jog frequency sc SC Sequence common Fig 6 7 Control Circuit Terminal During 5 step Operation Frequency reference 4 Frequenc Frequency reference reference 3 Frequency reference 2 Auxiliary speed fre quency Jog frequency Frequency reference 1 Master speed frequency Forward stop Multi step speed command 1 OFF on BE Multi step speed command 2 OFF Jog frequency seton o Fig 6 8 Multi step speed command Jog Frequency Selection Time Chart Run Command This section explains input methods for the run command Selecting the
185. g if hunt C6 02 and vibration at low ity m ing or vibration occurs at speeds low to middle range speeds Reduce the setting if Torque compensation STC Sn Oni Depends torque or speed response is and speed response 200 to 1000 primary delay time e Controlling hunting 9 Pe ms slow parameter C4 02 OE d ity Increase the setting if hunt and vibration 2 PO ing or vibration occurs Increase the setting if Improving torque at LA ios torque is insufficient at Torque compensation low speeds 1 1 00 0 50 to 1 50 EIE gain C4 01 Reduce the setting if hunt Controlling hunting 5A TD ing or vibration occurs for and vibration light loads Middle output fre oes uency voltage Improving torque at Depends Increase the setting it q y g p g torq P Default to torque is insufficient at 1 08 low speeds on capac a Default 3 low speeds Minimum output fre Controlling shock at ity and T to5 V Reduce the setting if shock quency voltage startup voltage 1 10 at startup is large The setting is given for 200 V Class Inverters Double the voltage for 400 V Class Inverters The following parameter will also affect the control system indirectly Name Parameter Number Table 4 5 Parameters Affecting Control and Applications Indirectly Application Acceleration deceleration times C1 01 to C1 11 Adjust torque during acceleration and deceler
186. he following usage conditions Ambient temperature Yearly average of 30 C Load factor 80 max Operating rate 12 hours max per day Replace with new board Determine need by inspection 8 4 Cooling Fan Replacement Outline m200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 18 5 kW or Less A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Inverter If the Inverter is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Inverter the cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel Removing the Cooling Fan 1 Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and then pull the fan out in the direction of arrow 2 2 Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the relay connector 3 Open the fan cover on the left and right sides and remove the fan cover from the fan Fan cover Fig 8 1 Cooling Fan Replacement Inverters of 18 5 kW or Less Mounting the Cooling Fan 1 Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan Be sure that the air flow direction indicated by the arrows above faces into the Inverter 2 Connect the relay connector securely and place the relay connector and cable into the fan cover 3 Mount the fan cover on the Inverter Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on the Inverter Maintenance and Inspection m200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 22 kW or More A cooling fan i
187. he heat source The Inverter cooling fan has stopped Replace the cooling fan Contact your OMRON representative Inverter Overheating Pre alarm An 2 alarm signal Inverter over heating alarm signal was input from a multi function input terminal S3 to ST Clear the multi function input termi nal s overheating alarm input Motor overheating E was set for H3 09 and the motor temperature thermistor input exceeded the alarm detection level The motor has overheated Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration deceleration and cycle times Check the V f characteristics Check the motor temperature input on terminals Al and A2 Overtorque 1 There has been a current greater than the setting in L6 02 for longer than the setting in L6 03 Make sure that the settings in L6 02 and L6 03 are appropriate Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque 7 8 Display Table 7 2 Alarm Displays and Processing Continued Meaning External error detected for Com munications Card other than SI K2 Continuing operation was specified for EFO F6 03 3 and an external fault was input from the Option Card Probable causes Corrective Actions Remove the cause of the external fault External fault Input terminal S3 External fault Input terminal S4 External fault Input terminal S5 External fault Input ter
188. hock WARNING Wiring must be performed by authorized personnel Not doing so may result in electrical shock WARNING Be sur to confirm operation only after wiring the emergency stop circuit Not doing so may result in injury Required Always connect the ground terminals to a ground of 100 Ohm or less for 200 V AC class or 10 Ohm or less for the 400 V class Not connecting to a proper ground may result in electrical shock or fire Caution Install external circuit breakers and take other safety measures against shortcir cuiting in external wiring Not doing so may result in fire Caution Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as the AC power supply voltage An incorrect power supply may result in fire injury or malfunction Caution Connect the Braking Resistor or Braking Resistor Unit as specified in the man ual Not doing so may result in fire Caution Be sure to wire correctly and securely Not doing so may result in injury or damage to the product Caution Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block Not doing so may result in fire injury or damage to the product Caution Do not connect an AC power source to the U V W output Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction A A A A A A A Caution Do not connect a load to the machine during auto tuning Not doing so may result in equipment dam
189. ically run and the motor line to line resistance measured based on these settings will be set Always set the above items Autotuning cannot be started otherwise Parameters can be changed from the setting displays Use the Increment Decrement and Digit Selection RESET keys to change the frequency The parameter will be written and the display will be returned to moni tor display when the ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting Autotuning Monitor Display Setting Display Autotuning Motor output power a Motor output power DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE Mila 2 Motor rated current onan 111 Motor rated current 1 ee L3 DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE Autotuning start Autotuning ESC Gee amp DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE DRE QUICK ADV VERIFY Fig 3 8 Operation in Autotuning Mode 3 2 If a fault occurs during autotuning refer to Chapter 7 IMPORTANT 3 12 Stop command input 2 Autotuning completed Chapter 4 Trial Operation This chapter describes the procedures for trial operation of the Inverter and provides an example of trial operation Trial Operation Flowchart eene 4 3 Trial Operation Procedures esee 4 4 Adjustment Suggestions nennen 4 13
190. ill be too long Check to be sure that the set value is suitable BThe stall prevention level during running is too low If the value set for L3 06 Stall Prevention Level during Running is too low the speed will drop before out putting torque Check to be sure that the set value is suitable If the Motor Operates Higher Than the Reference Use the following information if the motor operates on a higher level than the reference i The analog frequency reference bias setting is wrong the gain setting is wrong The frequency reference bias set in parameter H3 03 is added to the frequency reference Check to be sure that the set value is suitable BA signal is being input to the frequency reference current terminal A1 When IF frequency reference is set for parameter H3 09 Multi function Analog Input Terminal A2 Func tion Selection a frequency corresponding to the terminal A2 input voltage current is added to the frequency reference Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are suitable If Motor Deceleration is Slow Use the following information when the motor deceleration is slow mThe deceleration time is long even when braking resistor unit and braking unit is con nected The following causes are possible Stall prevention during deceleration enabled is set When Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit is connected set parameter L3 04 Stall Prevention Selection during Decelerat
191. imum output frequency There is a multi function analog input setting error If multi function analog input H3 09 is set to 1 frequency gain and if no voltage current is input then the frequency reference will be zero Check to be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct BThe motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected The load may be too heavy The Inverter has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost func tion but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too heavy Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load Also consider increasing the motor capacity If the Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed If the motor operates in the wrong direction the motor output wiring is faulty When the Inverter T1 U T2 V and T3 W are properly connected to the motor T1 U T2 V and T3 W the motor operates in a for ward direction when a forward run command is executed The forward direction depends on the manufacturer and the motor type so be sure to check the specifications The direction of rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among U V and W 7 14 Troubleshooting E If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low If the value set for L3 02 Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration is too low the acceleration time w
192. in C1 09 If inputting the emergency stop with a NO contact set the multi function input ter minal 1 00 to 28 or 2A or if inputting the emergency stop with a NC contact set the multi function input terminal H1 L1L1 to 29 or 2B After the emergency stop command has been input operation cannot be restarted until the Inverter has stopped To cancel the emergency stop turn OFF the run command and emergency stop command B Related Parameters Name Description Setting Factory Access LCD Display Range Setting Level Emergency stop time The deceleration time when the multi function input Emergency fast stop is ON 0 0 to This time will be used when a fault is detected for which 6000 0 Fast Stop Time emergency stop was programmed 6 16 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times Acceleration time indicates the time to increase the output frequency from 0 to 100 of the maximum out put frequency E1 04 Deceleration time indicates the time to decrease the output frequency from 100 to 0 of E1 04 The factory setting of the acceleration time is C1 01 and the factory setting of the deceleration time is C1 02 Related Parameters Param eter Number Name LCD Display Acceleration time 1 Accel Time 1 Description Set the acceleration time to accelerate from 0 to the maxi
193. ing L3 04 to Resistor Unit The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed Fig 10 3 10 9 Using an Analog Operator This example shows wiring for using an Analog Operator The Analog Operator model number is 3G3IV 950 or 3G3IV PJVOP960 This example shows wiring for the 3G3PV A2075 E 200 V class Inverters of 7 5 kW Short circuit bar not used ie C Megs qe o a Motor ere R L1 U T1 3 phase power s 3 SIL2 Inverter V T2 To T L3 W T3 z I I NEA j FWD RUN REV RUN STOP 1 1 Ground to 100 max SELL Lx 1 Forward run command s 2 1 forward run when closed 44 sja 1 S2 Reverse run command ae T 1 T reverse run when closed 1 37 4 EE e Mel 4 S4 MASTER S5 ulti function contact inputs 86 5 pm eed setting power 15 V 20 mA FREQSET 1 r L At Master speed 0 to 10 V 20 kQ bx p Master speed 4 to 20 mA 250 Q Bod i a isl ku 4 1 SOURCE t i nm tut E E ulti function contact 1 utput Default Running ae RUN Se 10 m ignal FAULT a 18 MTR CAL Frequency meter F Open collector 1 Multi function qo AMalog output l do pafutti function analog output Default Output frequency collector 2 USED M
194. ings Parameters are set as required in advanced programming mode i e with the ADV indicator lit on the Digital Operator All the parameters that can be set in quick programming mode can also be displayed and set in advanced programming mode i Setting Examples The following are examples of settings for applications To increase the speed of a 50 Hz motor by 10 set E1 04 to 55 0 Hz To use a0 to 10 V analog signal for a 50 Hz motor for variable speed operation between 0 and 45 Hz 0 to 9096 speed deduction set H3 02 to 90 0 To control speed between 20 and 80 to ensure smooth gear operation and limit the maximum speed of the machine set d2 01 to 80 0 and set 42 02 to 20 0 No load Operation This section describes trial operation in which the motor is in no load state that means the machine is not con nected to the motor To avoid failures caused due to the wiring of the control circuit it s recommended to use the LOCAL mode Press the LOCAL REMOTE Key on the Digital Operator to change to LOCAL mode the SEQ and REF indicators on the Digital Operator should be OFF Always confirm safety around the motor and machine before starting Inverter operation from the Digital Operator Confirm that the motor works normally and that no errors are displayed at the Inverter For applica tions at which the machine only can be driven in one direction check the motor rotation direction Jog Frequency Reference d1 17 defau
195. inuously during operation output stopped upon detection protected operation Torq Det Sel Factory Setting Machine Protection Torque detection level 1 V f control Inverter rated current is set as 100 0 to 300 Toq Det 1 Lvl Torque detection time 1 Set the overtorque undertorque detection time Torq Det 1 Time Multi function Output H2 01 and H2 02 Function Overtorque undertorque detection 1 NO NO contact Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is ON Overtorque undertorque detection 1 NC NC contact Overtorque detection and undertorque detection enabled when contact is OFF BL6 01 Set Values and LED Indicators The relationship between alarms displayed by the Digital Operator when overtorque or undertorque is detected and the set values in L6 01 is shown in the following table Function Overtorque undertorque detection disabled LED Indicator Overtorque Undertorque Detection 1 Overtorque detection only with speed matching operation continues after overtorque warning OL3 flashes Overtorque detected continuously during operation operation continues after overtorque warning OL3 flashes Overtorque detection only with speed matching output stopped upon detec tion protected operation OL3 lit Overtorque detected continuously during operation output stopped upon detection protected o
196. ion Setting Range Factory Setting Change during Operation Access Level RS 422A 485 Register Page The number of the parameter The name of the parameter Details on the function or settings of the parameter The setting range for the parameter The factory setting Indicates whether or not the parameter can be changed while the Inverter is in operation Yes Changes possible during operation No Changes not possible during operation Indicates the access level in which the user parameter can be moni tored or set Q Items which can be monitored and set in either quick program ming mode or advanced programming mode A Items which can be monitored and set only in advanced pro gramming mode The register number used for R S422A 485 communications Reference page for more detailed information about the parameter Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels B Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels MENU The following figure shows the Digital Operator display hierarchy for the Inverter Drive Mode Inverter can be operated and its status can be displayed Quick Programming Mode Minimum parameters required for operation can be monitored or set Advanced Programming Mode All parameters can be moni tored or set
197. ion to 0 disabled When this parameter is set to 1 enabled the factory setting braking resistor unit and the braking unit do not fully function The deceleration time setting is too long Check the deceleration time setting parameters C1 02 and C1 04 Motor torque is insufficient If the parameters are correct and there is no overvoltage fault then the motor s power is limited Consider increasing the motor capacity 7 15 mif the Vertical axis Load Drops When Brake is Applied The sequence is incorrect The Inverter goes into DC injection braking status for 0 5 seconds after deceleration is completed This is the factory set default To ensure that the brake holds set frequency detection 2 H2 01 5 for the multi function contact output ter minals M1 and M2 so that the contacts will turn OFF when the output frequency is greater than L4 01 3 0 to 5 0 Hz The contacts will turn ON below L4 01 There is hysteresis in frequency detection 2 1 a frequency detection width L4 02 2 0 Hz Change the setting to approximately 0 5 Hz if there are drops during stop Do not use the multi function contact output run signal H2 01 0 for the brake ON OFF signal If the Motor Overheats load is too big If the motor load is too heavy and the motor is used with the effective torque exceeding the motor s rated torque the motor will overheat Reduce the load amount by either
198. ion Analog Input Terminal A2 Selection has to be set to B PI feedback The PI feedback value can be adjusted by using the analog input terminal gain and bias BPI Adjustment Examples Suppressing Overshoot If overshoot occurs reduce Proportional gain P and increase integral time 1 Response Before adjustment After adjustment Time 6 67 Set a Rapidly Stabilizing Control Condition To stabilize the control even if overshoot occurs reduce integral time I Response P Before adjustment After adjustment Time Suppressing Long cycle Vibration If vibration occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time set value lengthen the integral time I to sup press the vibration Response Before adjustment Suppressing Short Cycle Vibration If vibration occures reduce the proportional gain P or increase the PI primary delay time parameter Response Before adjustment x N After adjustment ESetting Precautions In PI control the b5 04 parameter is used to prevent the calculated integral control value from exceeding a specified amount When the load varies rapidly Inverter response is delayed and the machine may be dam aged or the motor may stall In this case reduce the set value to speed up Inverter response The b5 06 parameter is used to prevent the arithmetic operation following the PI control calculation from exceeding a specified amount Set taking the maximum o
199. ion input command 4 Bit 8 Multi function input command 5 Bit 9 Multi function input command 6 BitA Multi function input command 7 Bits B to Not used 0002H Frequency reference Set units using parameter 01 03 0003H to 0005 Not used 0006H Not used 0007H Analog output 1 setting 0 V 0 to 11 V 726 10V 660 0008H Analog output 2 setting 0 V 0 to 11 V 726 gt 10V 660 Multi function contact output setting Bit 0 Contact output 1 Terminal M1 M2 1 0 OFF Bit 1 Contact output 2 Terminal M3 M4 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 2 Not used Bits 3 to5 Not used Bit 6 Set error contact terminal MA MC output using bit 7 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 7 Error contact terminal MA MC 1 ON 0 OFF Bits 8toF Not used 000AH to 000EH Not used 6 58 Individual Functions a Register No Contents Reference selection settings Bit 0 Not used Bit 1 Not used Bits 3 toB Not used Broadcast data terminal 55 input 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Broadcast data terminal S6 input 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Broadcast data terminal S7 input 1 Enabled 0 Disabled Not used Note Write 0 to all unused bits Also do not write data to reserved registers Monitor Data The following table shows the monitor data Monitor data can only be read Register No Contents Inverter status Bit 0 Operation 1 Operating
200. ion time deceleration time and cycle time are too short Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration deceler ation and cycle times The V f characteristics voltage is too high or too low Check the V f characteristics The Inverter capacity is too low Replace the Inverter with one that has a larger capacity Overtorque Detected 1 There has been a current greater than the setting in L6 02 for longer than the setting in L6 03 Make sure that the settings in L6 02 and L6 03 are appropri ate Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque High slip Braking OL The output frequency did not change for longer than the time set in N3 04 The inertia returned to the load is too large Make sure the load is an inertial load Set the system so that the decel eration time that does not pro duce 0 V is 120 s or less Undertorque Detected 1 There has been a current less than the setting in L6 02 for longer than the setting in L6 03 Make sure that the settings in L6 02 and L6 03 are appropri ate Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overtorque Display Table 7 1 Fault Displays and Processing Continued Description PI Feedback Reference Lost A PI feedback reference loss was detected b5 12 2 and the PI feed back input was less than b5 13 PI feedback loss detection level for longer than the time set in b5 1
201. ircuit terminal card 3 Loosen the mounting screws 1 on the left and right sides of the control terminals until they are free It is not necessary to remove these screws completely They are self rising 4 Pull the terminal card out sideways in direction 2 with the screws sticking out from the card mMounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card Reverse the removal procedure to mount the terminal card Confirm that the terminal circuit card and the controller properly meet at connector CN5 before pressing in on the card The connector pins may be bent if the card is forced into place possibly preventing correct Inverter operation Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card Fig 8 3 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card Chapter 9 Specifications This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Inverter and specifications for options and peripheral devices Standard Inverter Specifications esee 9 2 Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices 9 6 Standard Inverter Specifications Specifications by Model Specifications are given by model in the following tables 200 Class Table 9 1 200 V Class Inverters Model Number 3G3PV Max applicable motor output kW Rated output capacity kVA 17 22 27 32 44 Rated output current A i 45 58 71 85 115 200 208 220 230 or 240 VAC portional t
202. isplay BInputting the Frequency Reference Using Voltage Analog Setting When b1 01 is set to 1 you can input the frequency reference from control circuit terminal A1 voltage input or control circuit terminal A2 voltage or current input Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only If inputting the master speed frequency reference only input the voltage reference to control circuit terminal Al Inverter 2kQ V Power supply 15 V 20 mA 2kQ A1 Master speed frequency reference 4 A2 Auxiliary speed frequency reference AC Analog common Fig 6 4 Master Speed Frequency Reference Input Frequency Reference 2 Step Switching Master Auxiliary If performing 2 step switching between master and auxiliary speed frequencies input the master speed fre quency reference to control circuit terminal Al and input the auxiliary speed frequency reference to A2 When terminal S3 multi step speed command 1 is OFF terminal Al master speed frequency reference will be the Inverter frequency reference and when terminal S3 is ON terminal A2 auxiliary speed frequency refer ence will be the Inverter frequency reference Inverter 93 Multi step speed Master command 1 Auxiliary SC Sequence common V Power supply 15 V 20 mA 2kQ V A1 Master speed frequency 0to10 V reference input in A2 Auxiliary
203. king Resistor Units in 10 9 xiv Usirig an Analog Operalor 2 tet rettet dle etaient deett 10 10 Parameters 10 11 Revision Elistory 10 14 Chapter 1 Handling Inverters This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Inverter SYSDRIVE PV Introduction eere 1 2 Confirmations upon Delivery eere 1 4 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions eese 1 8 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site 1 11 Installation Orientation and Space 1 12 Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover 1 13 Removing Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Covers EHE RECS 1 14 MB RIVE PV Introduction SYSDRIVE PV Applications The SYSDRIVE is ideal for the following applications Fan blower and pump applications Settings must be adjusted to the application for optimum operation Refer to Chapter 4 Trial Operation SYSDRIVE PV Models The SYSDRIVE PV Series of Inverters includes two kinds of Inverters in two voltage classes 200 V and 400 V Maximum motor capacities vary from 0 4 to 160 kW Table 1 1 SYSDRIVE PV Models 1 2 Protective Structure Maximum Motor Capacity Basic Model Number
204. l occur This is extremely hazardous Do not short the output wires Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor or Noise Filter Never connect a phase advancing capacitor or LC RC noise filter to an output circuit The high frequency components of the Inverter output may result in overheating or damage to these part or may result in damage to the Inverter or cause other parts to burn Do Not Use an Electromagnetic Switch Never connect an electromagnetic switch MC between the Inverter and motor and turn it ON or OFF during operation If the MC is turned ON while the Inverter is operating a large inrush current will be caused and the overcurrent protection in the Inverter will operate When using an MC to switch to a commercial power supply stop the Inverter and motor before operating the MC Use the speed search function if the MC is operated during operation If measures for momentary power interrupts are required use a delayed release MC Installing a Thermal Overload Relay This Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating If however more than one motor is operated with one Inverter or a multi polar motor is used always install a thermal relay THR between the Inverter and the motor and set L1 01 to 0 no motor protection The sequence should be designed so that the contacts of the thermal overload relay turn OFF the magnetic contactor on the main circuit inputs Installing a Noise Fil
205. lass Wire Sizes n Recom Inverter Termi Tightening Possible mended Model Terminal Symbol nal Torque Wire Sizes Wire Size Wire Type 3G3PV Screws Nem mm AwG mm AWG R LI S L2 T L3 D1 amp U TI V T2 W T3 1 2 to 1 5 R LI S L2 T L3 1 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 2 to 1 5 Q3 R LI S L2 T L3 1 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 2to 1 5 NM R LI S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 2 to 1 5 2L R LI S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 1 2 to 1 5 i R LI S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 2105 5 1 2 to 1 5 UTE S amp S R LI S L2 T L2 1 3 5 to 5 5 U T1 V T2 W T3 TET 12 to 10 2105 5 14 to 10 R LI S L2 T L3 D1 U T1 V T2 W T3 ixeis ZI wx Power cables 751555 e g 600 V vinyl Q 12 to 10 J power cables R LI S L2 T L3 1 4 U T1 V T2 W T3 5 5 to 14 R 10 to 6 D R LI 512 T L3 1 8 to 14 2 5 U T1 V T2 W T3 8 to 6 AN 2 5 5 5 to 14 4 0 to 5 0 10 to 6 Cae IN R L1 S L2 T L3 1 2 U T1 V T2 40050 8 to 38 W T3 8 to 2 81022 8 to 4 R LI S L2 T L3 1 3 U T1 V T2 40050 141022 W T3 R1 L11 81121 T1 L31 6 to 4 14 to 38 9 0 to 10 0 6 to 2 R LI S L2 T L2 1 3 U T1 V T2 40to 5 0 22 W T3 RULII 81121 TI L31 4 221038 4 to 2
206. lem 1 02 02 STOP key during control circuit terminat operan STOP 025057 Frequency ference setting method seecion fof 0206 Operation selection when digital operator is discommested o SLUT Cumulative operationtimeseting S 02 08 Cumulative operation time secto o SMS timeseting SEIT Fat wace history mitais 30r Copytinetionseleowon 030 Readpermitedseleowon 9 Not initialized PV E specifications A1 00 0 For Inverters with a capacity of 55 kW or more 2 00 v Setting range and initial setting depend on Inverter capacity Setting for 200 V class Inverters For 400 V class Inverters double the value Factory setting in the parentheses is for 3 wire sequence The contents is ignored if the setting is 0 0 amp X QN amp Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No 1537 2 01 Revision Code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code Revised content
207. leration deceleration Time 2 C1 03 C1 04 Fig 6 18 Acceleration deceleration Time Switching Frequency E Entering S curve Characteristics in the Acceleration and Deceleration Time By performing acceleration using an S curve pattern you can reduce shock when starting the machine By using the SYSDRIVE PV inverter you can set an S curve characteristic time for each of the following At acceleration start and at acceleration end For deceleration start and deceleration end the S curve characteristic times are fixed to 0 2 sec They can not be switched off or changed Acceleration time Selected acceleration time Acceleration start time S curve characteristic time EN When S curve is set calculate acceleration deceleration time as follows Acceleration end time S curve characteristic time 2 INFO 6 18 Acceleration Deceleration Characteristics Preventing the Motor from Stalling During Acceleration Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the motor from stalling if a heavy load is applied to the motor or sudden rapid acceleration is performed If you set L3 01 to 1 enabled and the Inverter output current exceeds the 15 level of the set value in L3 02 the acceleration rate will begin to slow down When L3 02 is exceeded acceleration will stop If you set L3 01 to 2 optimum adjustment the motor current accelerates to the value set in L
208. lightening the load or lengthening the accel eration deceleration time Also consider increasing the motor capacity BThe ambient temperature is too high The motor rating is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range The motor will burn out if it is run continuously at the rated torque in an environment in which the maximum ambient operating temperature is exceeded Lower the motor s ambient temperature to within the acceptable ambient operating temperature range BThe withstand voltage between the motor phases is insufficient When the motor is connected to the Inverter output a surge is generated between the Inverter switching and the motor coil Normally the maximum surge voltage is three times the Inverter s input power supply voltage i e 1 200 V for 400 V class Be sure to use a motor with a withstand voltage between the motor phases that is greater than the maximum surge voltage In particular when using a 400 V class Inverter use a special motor for Inverters If peripheral devices like PLC s or other are influenced by the starting or running inverter If noise is generated by Inverter switching implement the following countermeasures Change the Inverter s Carrier Frequency Selection C6 02 to lower the carrier frequency This will help to some extent by reducing the amount of internal switching Install an Input Noise Filter at the Inverter s power supply input area Install an Outp
209. llation Install the Inverter in a location free from chlorides Install the Inverter in a location not in direct sunlight Controlling the Ambient Temperature To enhance the reliability of operation the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature increases If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment such as a box use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 45xC Protecting the Inverter from Foreign Matter Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling Always remove the cover from the Inverter after completing installation Otherwise ventilation will be reduced causing the Inverter to overheat 1 10 Installation Orientation and Space Installation Orientation and Space Provide an appropriate stopping device on the machine side to secure safety WARNING A holding brake is not a stopping device for securing safety Not doing so may result in injury WARNING Provide an external emergency stopping device that allows an instantaneous stop of operation and power interruption Not doing so may result in injury Be sure to install the product in the correct direction and provide specified Caution clearances between the Inverter and control panel or with other devices to allow for proper cooling Not doing so may result in fire or malfunction Do not allow foreign o
210. ls Generation of OV Over Voltage and stalling can occur if a fan is turning when it is started The DC injection braking is insufficient when starting This can be prevented by slowing fan rotation by DC injection braking before starting the fan Increase the parameter b2 03 DC injection braking time initial excitation at start setting 1f Output Frequency Does Not Rise to Frequency Reference mThe frequency reference is within the jump frequency range When the jump frequency function is used the output frequency does not change within the jump frequency range Check to be sure that the Jump Frequency parameters d3 01 to d3 03 and Jump Frequency Width parameter d3 04 settings are suitable mThe frequency reference upper limit has been reached The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula Maximum Output Frequency E1 04 x Frequency Reference Upper Limit 42 01 100 Check to be sure that the parameter E1 04 and d2 01 settings are suitable 7 18 Chapter 8 Maintenance and Inspection This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Inverter Maintenance and 8 2 8 2 ss Maintenance and Inspection Daily Inspection Check the following items with the system in operation The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises There should be no abnormal h
211. lt 6 00 Hz can be started and stopped by pressing and releasing the JOG Key on the Digital Operator If the external sequence prevent operation from the Digital Operator con firm that emergency stop circuits and machine safety mechanisms are functioning and then start operation in REMOTE mode 1 with a signal from the control signal terminals The safety precautions must always be taken before starting the Inverter with the motor connected to the machine be provided to start Inverter operation A Both a RUN command forward or reverse and a frequency reference or multi step speed command must Input these commands and reference regardless of the operation method i e LOCAL of REMOTE Trial Operation Procedures Loaded Operation ll Connecting the Load After confirming that the motor has stopped completely connect the mechanical system Be sure to tighten all the screws when securing the motor shaft to the mechanical system BlOperation using the Digital Operator Use the Digital Operator to start operation in LOCAL mode in the same way as in no load operation If fault occurs during operation make sure the STOP Key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible At first set the frequency reference to a low speed of one tenth the normal operating speed Checking Operating Status Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow speed increase
212. lti function analog output from the Inverter and is used to display rota tional speeds of motors line speeds etc in physical units Models and Application K3TJ V11 0 The standard models of Scaling Meters are listed in the following table Model No K3TJ V111R K3TJ V111G Control Power Supply 100 to 200 VAC Display Red LED Green LED K3TJ V116R K3TJ V116G 24 VDC isolated Red LED Green LED See note Note The power supply circuit is isolated from the input circuits Standard Specifications The standard specifications of the Scaling Meters are listed below K3TJ V110 Specifications Sampling Period 2 times s Display Refresh Cycle 2 times s Measurement Averaging Methods Simple average or moving average Number of Samples for Averaging 1 2 4 or 8 samples Max No of Display Digits 4 digits 1999 to 9999 Display 7 segment LEDs character height 14 2 mm Decimal Point Display User set using function selection switch and up down keys Scaling Method Shifting and scaling are user set using function selection switch and up down keys Scaling Range 1999 to 9999 Zero Limit Range 0 to 99 digits Overrange Values Flashing display Zero Suppression Supported External Controls Present value hold by short circuiting terminal on front panel Protective Structure conforming to IEC standar
213. m their fac tory set values Autotuning mode Use this mode when running a motor with unknown motor parameters in the vector control mode The motor parameters are calculated and set automatically This mode can also be used to measure only the motor line to line resistance Always perform autotuning with the motor before operating using vector control Autotuning Mode will not be displayed during operation or when an error has occurred Switching Modes The mode selection display will appear when the MENU key is pressed from a monitor or setting display Press the MENU key from the mode selection display to switch between the modes Press the ENTER key from the mode selection key to monitor data and from a monitor display to access the setting display MENU Drive Mode F 888 ae in 5 7 DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE Quick Programming Mode ecoece DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE Advanced Programming Mode a J eoe 0 ee DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE DRME QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE When returning from a setting E display the rightmost digit of the monitor display will flash DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE DRIVE QUICK ADV ASTUNE Autotuning Ifa user constant is changed Mode the number will be displayed a e e e e M A
214. magnetic contactors and relays near the Inverter Isolates I O signals Isolator Magnetic Isolates the I O signals of the Inverter and is effective contactor against inductive noise Improves the input DC Reactor 3G3HV PUZDABLI Used to improve the input power factor of the Inverter All Inverters of 22 kW or higher contain built in DC reactors AC reactor to improve power i 5 ss Inst factor power factor of the AC Reactor 3G31V PUZBABU These are optional for Inverters of 18 5 kW or less Install Inverter DC and AC reactors for applications with a large power supply capacity 600 kVA or higher Reduces noise coming into the inverter from the power 3G3IV PFNLI supply line and to reduce noise flowing from the inverter Input Noise Filter Reduces the affects of 3G3EV PLNFLI into the power supply line Connect as close to the Zero phase radio and control device noise Inverter as possible reactor Output Noise Fil ter 3G3IV PLFLI Reduces noise generated by the inverter Connect as close to the inverter as possible Enables stopping the machine in a set time Braking Resistor Unit 3G3IV PLKEBLI Consumes the regenerative motor energy with a resistor to reduce deceleration time use rate 1096 ED Braking Unit is needed Braking Unit 3G3IV PCDBRLIB Used with a Braking Resistor Unit to reduce the decelera tion time of the motor Input line noise filter J
215. make the settings using the following method Table 6 2 READ Function Procedure Digital Operator Display Explanation Press the MENU key and select advanced pro gramming mode DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE Press the ENTER key and select the parameters monitor display 7 Display 03 01 Copy Function Selection using the Increment key and Decrement key DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE Press the ENTER key and select the parameters ee setting display DRIVE QUICK ADV Change the set value to 1 using the Increment key Set the changed data using the ENTER key The READ function will start If the READ function ends normally End is displayed on the Digital Operator Parameter 03 01 is automatically reset to 0 and then the display returns to 03 01 If an error is displayed press any key to cancel the error display and return to the 03 01 display Error displays and their descriptions are shown below Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Func tion Error Display Description You are attempting to set 03 01 to 1 while 03 02 is set to 0 Read data length mismatch or read data error Unable to write parameters to EEPROM on the Digital Operator Select READ Permitted Prevent overwriting the data stored in EEPROM in the Digital Operator by mistake With 03 02 set to 0 if you set 03 01 to 1 and perform the write operation PrE will be di
216. me is disre garded When a braking option Braking Resistor Braking Resistor Unit Brak ing Unit is used always set to 0 to 2 The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity These are values for a 200 V class Inverter Values for a 400 V class Inverter are After autotuning E1 13 will contain the same value as E1 05 The factory setting depends on the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW is given The setting range is from 10 to 200 of the Inverter rated output current The value for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW is given ouble Parameter Tables Parameter Tables A Setup Settings B Initialize Mode A1 Name Param E Factory eter Description Number LCD Display Setting RS 422A 485 Register Language selection for Used to select the language Digital Opera displayed on the Digital tor display Operator Display 0 English 1 Japanese 2 German 3 French Select Lan 4 Italian guage 5 Spanish 6 Portugese This parameter is not initial ized by the initialize opera tion Used to set the parameter Parameter access level set read 1 IE Monitoring only Moni toring drive mode and setting A1 01 and Al 04 Advanced Parameters can be read and set in both quick programming mode Q and advanced pro gramming A mode Acces Level Used to initialize th
217. minal S6 External fault Input terminal S7 An external fault was input from a multi function input terminal S3 to S7 Reset external fault inputs to the multi function inputs Remove the cause of the external fault PI Feedback Reference Lost A PI feedback reference loss was detected b5 12 2 and the PI feed back input was less than b5 13 PI feedback loss detection level for longer than the time set in b5 14 PI feedback loss detection time RS 422A 485 Communications Error Normal reception was not possible for 2 s or longer after received control data Check the communication devices and signals Option Card Communication Error A communication error occurred in a mode where the run command or a frequency reference is set from a Communications Option Card Check the communication devices and signals Communications on Standby Control data was not normally received when power was turned ON Check the communication devices and signals Protective and Diagnostic Functions Operation Errors An operation error will occur if there is an invalid setting or a contradiction between two parameter settings It will not be possible to start the Inverter until the parameters have been set correctly The alarm output and fault contact outputs will not operate When an operation error has occurred refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the
218. mmands 1 and 2 are set for the multi function contact terminals an invalid multi function input selection operation error will occur Set either external search command 1 or external search command 2 If performing speed search using external search commands add an external sequence so that the run com mand and external search command are both ON This two commands must be kept on at least for the time set in parameter L2 03 If the Inverter output is equipped with a contact set the contact operation delay time in the Speed Search Wait Time b3 05 The factory setting is 0 2 s When not using the contact you can reduce the search time by setting 0 0 s After waiting for the speed search wait time the Inverter starts the speed search Parameter b3 02 is a current detection speed search current detection level for search completion When the current falls below the detection level the speed search is viewed as completed and the motor acceler ates or decelerates to the set frequency If an overcurrent OC is detected when using speed search after power recovery lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 B Application Precautions for Speed Searches Using Estimated Speed Always perform stationary autotuning for line to line resistance before using speed searches based on esti mated speeds If the cable length between the motor and Inverter is changed after autotuning has been performed per form autotuning again
219. modify the product Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product Do not store install or operate the product in the following places Doing so may result in electrical shock fire or damage to the product Locations subject to direct sunlight Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes Caution temperature Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gasses Locations very close to combustable materials Locations subject to dust especially iron dust or salts Locations subject to exposure to water oil or chemicals Locations subject to shock or vibrations Caution Do not touch the Inverters cooling fins regenerative resistor or the motor while the power is being supplied or soon after the power is turned OFF Doing so may result in a skinburn due to the hot surface Caution Do not conduct a dielectric stregth test on any part of the Inverter Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction Caution Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations Not doing so may result in equipment damage Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields and magnetic fields Locations subject to possible exposure to radio activity
220. mum output frequency in 1 second units Deceleration time 1 Decel Time 1 Set the deceleration time in seconds for the output fre quency to fall from 100 to 0 Acceleration time 2 Accel Time 2 Acceleration time when multi function input Accelera tion deceleration time selection 1 is ON Deceleration time 2 Decel Time 2 Deceleration time when multi function input Accelera tion deceleration time selection 1 is ON Setting Range 0 0 to 6000 0 Factory Setting Access Level Acceleration deceleration time switching frequency Acc Dec SW Freq Set the frequency at which acceleration deceleration time switches automatically Less than set frequency Acceleration deceleration time 2 Set frequency or above Acceleration deceleration time 1 Multi function inputs Acceleration deceleration time selection 1 and Acceleration deceleration time selection 2 are given priority 0 0 to 120 0 S curve characteristic time at acceleration start SCrv Acc Start S curve characteristic time at acceleration end SCrv Dec End Set the S curve characteristic time for each part in sec onds When you set the S curve characteristic time the start time and end time S curve characteristic time s acceleration time is lengthened by 1 2 only Run command _ Output frequency Time The S curve characteristic time at start and end of deceler atio
221. n REMOTE This Key can be enabled or disabled by setting user parameter 02 01 MENU Key Selects menu items modes Returns to the status before the DATA ENTER Key was pressed Enables jog operation when the Inverter is being operated from the Digital Operator Selects the rotation direction of the motor when the Inverter is being EWDIREV Key operated from the Digital Operator Sets the number of digits for user parameter settings Diet Selecion RESET Key Also acts as the Reset key when a fault has occurred Selects menu items sets user parameter numbers and increments set Increment Key values Used to move to the next item or data Selects menu items sets user parameter numbers and decrements set Decrement Key values Used to move to the previous item or data Pressed to enter menu items user parameters and set values Also used to switch from one screen to another ENTER Key Starts the Inverter operation when the Inverter is being controlled by the Digital Operator Stops Inverter operation STOP Key This Key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the control circuit terminal by setting user parameter 02 02 Note Except in diagrams Keys are referred to using the Key names listed in the above table 3 4 De There are indicators on the upper left of the RUN and STOP Keys on the Digital Operator These indicators will light and flash to indicate operating status
222. n E Terminal FM Gain 21 Terminal AM Gain e DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY Fig 3 5 Operations in Quick Programming Mode Modes Advanced Programming Mode In advanced programming mode all Inverter parameters can be monitored and set parameters can be changed from the setting displays Use the Increment Decrement and Digit Selection RESET keys to change the frequency The user parameter will be written and the display will return to moni tor display when the ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting Refer to Chapter 5 Parameters for details on the parameters Example Operations Key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure Mode Selection display Function Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display ENU Advanced Programming Mode Setup settings Language E t C i fii nn A 4 1 A i 00 j vu Ay DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE Access level J Miya Initialize nanan Uuuu controlbox b5 xx PI Control mode selection fin 55 5 0 1 uu Ec hy Proportional Gain aJ MY A a loss detection time Ti in e Ec My Read permitted selection e See eevee DRIVE QUICK ADV VERFY ATUNE Fig 3 6 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode 3 10 Setting Parameters Here the procedure is shown to change C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 from 10 s to 20 s Table
223. n b2 04 For deceleration time settings refer to page 6 17 Setting Acceleration and Deceleration Times Run command ON OFF ecelerates to stop at deceleration time Output frequency DC injection brake injection brake time when ing b2 04 Fig 6 12 Deceleration to Stop Coast to Stop If the stop command is input 1 the run command is turned OFF when b1 03 is set to 1 the Inverter output voltage is interrupted The motor coasts to a stop Run command ON OFF Output frequency Inverter output frequency interrupted Fig 6 13 Coast to Stop EN After the stop command is input run commands are ignored until the Minimum Baseblock Time L2 03 has elapsed INFO e 11 EDC Braking Stop After the stop command is input and the minimum baseblock time L2 03 is elapsed DC injection will be applied to the motor The applied DC injection current is programmed in parameter b2 02 The DC injection brake time is determined by the set value in b2 04 and the output frequency when the stop command is input DC injection brake time Run command OFF Output frequency ON b2 04 x 10 nverter output voltage interrupted DC injection brake a gt b2 04 Minimum baseblock Output frequency at time L2 03 I DG injection brake time stop command input 1096 100 maximum output frequency Fig 6 14 DC Injection Braking
224. n completed Factory Setting Same as Inverter rated output Motor rated current Set the rated current of the motor in Amps 1 Fora parameter output motor set the value at the base speed 10 to 20096 of Inverter rated current Same as general purpose motor with same capacity as Inverter Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning Trial Operation Procedures The following displays will appear on the Digital Operator during autotuning Table 4 3 Digital Operator Displays during Autotuning Digital Operator Display Description Motor rated T1 02 DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY The autotuning start display will appear when all set tings through T1 04 have been completed The A TUNE and DRIVE indicators will be lit Autotuning started TUn10 DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY Autotuning will start when the RUN Key is pressed from the autotuning start display Autotuning Stop command input DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE If the STOP Key is pressed or a measurement error occurs during autotuning and error message will be display and autotuning will be stopped Refer to Errors during Autotuning on page 7 10 Autotuning completed II I DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE END will be displayed after approximately 1 to 2 min utes indicating that autotuning has been completed Application Sett
225. n is fixed to 0 2 sec and can not be changed 0 00 to 2 50 0 00 to 2 50 Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi Function Input Terminal Com mands Using the SYSDRIVE PV you can set two acceleration times and two deceleration times When the multi function input terminals H1 00 are set to 7 acceleration deceleration time selection 1 you can switch the acceleration deceleration time even during operation The following table shows the acceleration deceleration time switching combinations Acceleration Deceleration Time 3 3 Acceleration Time Deceleration Time Selection 1 Terminal Nee _ Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Automatically Use this setting when you want to switch acceleration deceleration time automatically using the output fre quency When the output frequency reaches the set value in C1 11 the Inverter switches the acceleration deceleration time automatically as shown in the following diagram Set C1 11 to a value other than 0 0 Hz If C1 11 is set to 0 0 Hz the function will be disabled Output frequency Acceleration decele ration time switching frequency C1 11 4 1 03 rate C1 01 rate C1 02 rate C1 04 rate When output frequency C1 11 acceleration and deceleration are performed using Acceleration deceleration Time 1 C1 01 C1 02 When output frequency lt C1 11 acceleration and deceleration are performed using Acce
226. nalog 41020 mA 250 W s 0 to 10 V 20 KW input v M3 Negroes Pet 0 9 j Multifunction output 1 i Of Terminating M4 250 VAC 1 A max 30 VDC 1 A resistance j Default Zero speed output 2 PNP connection i l Shield terminal Frequency setting A gl Fault contact output adjustment 1 s 2k Q9 V Frequency setting power Q SVE TA ma Frequency L 15 V 20 mA MC External setter 5 Frequency setting power frequency 0 to 10 V 1 2kQ 1 Master speed reference 1 references i 0 to 10 V 20 kW 2 4 Multi function output 5 5 4 4 A2 M2 250 VAC 1 A max Master speed reference 1 30 VDC 1 A max T l H Defaut Running signal RS 485 422 communications Fig 2 19 Control Circuit Terminal Connections Control Circuit Wiring Precautions Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 U T1 V T2 W T3 G1 2 and 3 and other high power lines Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA MB MC M1 M2 M3 and M4 contact outputs from wiring to other control circuit terminals f using an optional external power supply it shall be a UL Listed Class 2 power supply source Use twisted pair or shielded twisted pair cables for control circuits to prevent
227. nating resistance Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1 Turn ON the power supply to the Inverter again RP R 8 S Fig 6 41 Details of Communications Terminals During normal operation the Digital Operator displays the frequency reference value If an error occurs a CE RS 422A 485 communications error alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator the error contact output will be turned ON and the Inverter operation ready signal will be turned OFF 6 64 Individual Functions Using PI Control PI control is a method of making the feedback value detection value match the set target value By combin ing proportional control P and integral control I you can even control targets machinery with play time The characteristics of the PI control operations are given below P control Outputs the amount of operation proportional to the deviation You cannot however set the deviation to zero using P control alone I control Outputs the amount of operation that integrates the deviation Used for matching feedback value to the target value EPI Control Operation To understand the differences between the PI control operations P and I the variation in the amount of opera tion output frequency is as shown in the following diagram when the deviation i e the difference between the target value and feedback value is fixed Deviation PI control Amount of operation c
228. nce voltage when the previous fault occurred DC bus volt age at fault DC Bus Volt age The main current DC voltage when the previous fault occurred Output power at fault Output kWatts The output power when the previ ous fault occurred Input terminal status at fault Input Term Sts The input terminal status when the previous fault occurred The format is the same as for U1 10 Output Signal Level During Multi Function Analog Output Cannot be output Access Level RS 422A 485 Register Parameter Tables Param Name Output Signal Level eee RS 422A CCE Description During Multi Function Analog 485 Number LCD Diplay Output ied Register Output termi nal d at The output terminal status when the previous fault occurred The Output Term format is the same as for U1 11 Sts Operation sta tus at fault The operating status when the previous fault occurred The for Cannot be output Inverter Sta mat is the same as for U1 12 tus Cumulative operation time at fault The operating time when the pre vious fault occurred Elapsed Time Note The following errors are not included in the error trace CPF00 01 02 03 UV1 and UV2 5 42 History Last fault LCD Display Last Fault Description The error conten
229. nd on the Inverter capacity 3 Can be set and referenced only when C6 02 is set to F Carrier Frequency When selecting the carrier frequency observe the following precautions Adjust the carrier frequency according to the cases shown below If the wiring distance between Inverter and motor is long Set the carrier frequency low Use the following values as guidelines Wiring Length 100 m or less Over 100 m eas frequency aye 15 kHz 1 to 4 10 kHz 1 to 2 5 KHz If speed and torque are inconsistent at low speeds Set the carrier frequency low If Inverter noise is affecting peripheral devices Set the carrier frequency low If leakage current from the Inverter is large Set the carrier frequency low If metallic noise from the motor is large Set the carrier frequency high The carrier frequency can be varied to match the output frequency as shown in the following diagram by setting C6 03 Carrier Frequency Upper Limit C6 04 Carrier Frequency Lower Limit and C6 05 Car rier Frequency Proportional Gain Application and Overload Selections Carrier 06 03 p Output frequency x 06 05 06 04 e xK Output frequency E1 04 Max Output Frequency Fig 6 1 K is the coefficient determined by the set value in C6 03 C6 03 10 0 kHz K 3 10 0 kHz gt C6 03 5 0 kHz K 2 5 0 kHz lt C6 03 K 1 To fix the carrier frequency set C6 03 and C6 04 to the same value or set C6 05 to 0 If Car
230. ndicator flash and enter the drive mode by pressing the ENTER key The DRIVE indicator will light when drive mode is entered The operation method selection is wrong If parameter b1 02 reference selection is set to 0 Digital Operator the motor will not operate when an external operation signal is input Set b1 02 to 1 control circuit terminal and try again Similarly the motor will also not operate if the LOCAL REMOTE key has been pressed to switch to Digital Operator operation In that case press the LOCAL REMOTE key again to return to the original setting The LOCAL REMOTE key is enabled by setting 02 01 to 1 and disabled by setting 02 01 to 0 It is enabled Sa when the drive mode is entered INFO A 3 wire sequence is in effect The input method for a 3 wire sequence is different than when operating by forward stop and reverse stop 2 wire sequence When 3 wire sequence is set the motor will not operate even when an input terminal suitable for forward run stop and reverse run stop is turned ON When using a 3 wire sequence refer to the timing chart and input the proper signals When using a 2 wire sequence set the multi function input terminal H1 01 through H1 05 terminals S3 to S7 to a value other than 0 The frequency reference is too low If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E1 09 Minimum Output Frequency the Inverter will not operate Raise the frequency reference to at least the min
231. ng circum stances When the motor is oscillating Comp increase the set values Time When the responsiveness of the motor is low decrease the set values ll Carrier Frequency Param eter Number Name LCD Display Carrier fre quency selection Description Select carrier wave fixed pattern Select F to enable detailed settings Carrier Freq Selection using parameters C6 03 to C6 05 Factory Setting Parameter Tables RS 422A 485 Register Carrier fre quency upper limit Carrier Freq Max Set the carrier frequency upper limit and lower limit in KHz units The carrier frequency gain is set as follows Carrier fre quency lower limit Carrier Freq Min Carrier fre quency pro portional gain Carrier Freq Gain Carrier frequency Output frequency x C6 05 x K utput E1 04 frequency Max output frequency K is a coefficient that depends on the set ting of C6 03 C6 03 gt 10 0 kHz K 23 10 0 kHz gt C6 03 2 5 0 kHz K 2 5 0 kHz gt C6 03 K 1 1 The factory setting depends on the capacity of the Inverter 2 The setting range depends on the capacity of the Inverter 3 This parameter can be monitored or set only when F is set for C6 02 5 16 Reference Parameters d B Preset Reference d1 Name LCD Display Frequency reference 1
232. ng fan Power elements Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the elements Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 39 2 x 10 to 58 8 x 10 Pa 4 to 6 kgecm Smoothing capacitor Are there any irregularities such as dis coloration or odor Replace the capacitor or Inverter Maintenance and Inspection Periodic Maintenance of Parts The Inverter is configured of many parts and these parts must be operating properly in order to make full use of the Inverter functions Among the electronic components there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage condi tions In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time it is necessary to perform period inspections and replace parts according to their service life Periodic inspection standards vary depending the Inverter s installation environment and usage conditions The Inverter s maintenance periods are noted below Keep them as reference Cooling fan Table 8 2 Part Replacement Guidelines Standard Replacement Period 2 to 3 years Replacement Method Replace with new part Smoothing capacitor 5 years Replace with new part Determine need by inspection Breaker relays Determine need by inspection Fuses 10 years Replace with new part Aluminum capacitors on PCBs 5 years Note The standard replacement period is based on t
233. nications time out 1 occurred Bit F RS 422A 485 communications time out 1 Timed out Multi function contact output status Bit 0 Multi function contact output 1 terminal M1 M2 1 ON 0 OFF Bit 1 Multi function contact output 2 terminal M3 M4 1 ON 0 OFF Bit2 Not used Bits 3 to F Not used 002EH 0030H Not used 0031H Main circuit DC voltage 0032H 0037H Not used 0038H PI feedback quantity Input equivalent to 100 Max output frequency 10 196 without sign 0039H PI input quantity 100 Max output frequency 10 196 with sign 003AH PI output quantity 100 4Max output frequency 10 196 with sign 003BH CPU software number 003CH Flash software number Communications error details Bit 0 CRC error Bit 1 Invalid data length Bit 2 Not used Bit 3 Parity error Bit 4 Overrun error Bit 5 Framing error Bit 6 Time out Bits 7 to F Not used KVA setting 6 61 Register No Note Communications error details are stored until an error reset is input you can also reset while the Unit is operating Broadcast Data The following table shows the broadcast data You can also write this data Register Adres Contents Operation signal Bit 0 Run command 1 Operating 0 Stopped Bit 1 Reverse operation command 1 Reverse 0 Forward Bits 2 Not used Bit 4 External er
234. not detect 1 Detect Send wait time Transmit Wait TIM Set the time from the Inverter receiving data to when the Inverter starts to send RTS control ON OFF RTS Control Sel Select to enable or disable RTS control 0 Disabled RTS is always ON 1 Enabled RTS turns ON only when sending Set H5 01 to 0 to disable Inverter responses to RS 422A 485 communications 5 20 Protection Function Parameters L The following settings are made with the protection function parameters L parameters Motor selection func tion power loss ridethrough function stall prevention function frequency detection torque limits and hard ware protection E Motor Overload L1 Name i RS 422A Description Setting Factory Access He LCD Display Range Setting Level Register Sets whether the motor overload function is enabled or disabled at E electric thermal overload relay 0 Disabled 1 General purpose motor protec tion In some applications when the Inverter power supply is turned MOL Fault Sel off the thermal value is reset so even if this parameter is set to 1 protection may not be effective Motor protec Sets the electric thermal detection time seconds units Usually changing this setting is not necessary The factory setting is 150 over load for one minute When the motor s overload resis tance is known also set the over
235. nt as a percentage of the Inverter rated current DCInj Current DC injection braking time at start Used to set the time to perform DC injection braking at start Used to stop coasting motor and restart it When the set DCInj Time Start value is 0 DC injection braking at start is not performed 0 00 s BInputting the DC Injection Brake Command from Control Circuit Terminals If you set a multi function contact input terminal 1 00 to 60 DC injection brake command you can apply the DC injection brake to the motor by turning ON the terminal for which the DC injection brake com mand has been set when the Inverter is being stopped The time chart for the DC injection brake is shown below DC injection brake command Output frequency DC injection brake 41 09 b2 01 injection brake If you input the DC injection brake command from an external terminal or if the run command and jog command are input the DC injection brake will be disabled and operation will resume Fig 6 16 DC Injection Brake Time Chart 6 13 6 14 Using Highslip braking When the system is operating the Inverter is delivering an amount of electrical energy to the motor this energy is transformed into mechanical and thermal energy As a generator the motor efficiency is still high Most of the energy returns to the Inverter as current flow This regenerated current is stored in the DC bus
236. ntrol RS 422A 485 communications 19 2 kbps maximum fault reset and function copy ing Protective functions Motor protection Protection by electronic thermal overload relay Fuse blown protection Stops for fuse blown Overload protection 12066 of rated output current for 1 minute Overvoltage protection 200 Class Inverter Stops when main circuit DC voltage is above 410 V 400 Class Inverter Stops when main circuit DC voltage is above 820 V Undervoltage protection 200 Class Inverter Stops when main circuit DC voltage is below 190 V 400 Class Inverter Stops when main circuit DC voltage is below 380 V Momentary power loss ridethru Stops for 15 ms or more By selecting the momentary power loss method operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s Cooling fin overheating Protection by thermistor Stall prevention Stall prevention during acceleration deceleration or running Grounding protection Protection by electronic circuits 5096 of inverter rated current Charge indicator Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx 50 V or more Protective structure Enclosed wall mounted type NEMA 1 18 5 kW or less same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters Open chassis type IP00 22 kW or more same for 200 V and 400 V class Inverters Environment Ambient operating tem perature 10 C to 40 C Enclosed wall mounted type 10 to 4
237. o 2F in one of the parameters H1 01 to H1 05 multi function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection Select the value to be set in H1 01 to H1 05 from a combination of any of the following three conditions Signal input level from peripheral devices External error detection method Operation during external error detection The following table shows the relationship between the combinations of conditions and the set value in Input Level Error Detection Method See Note 1 See Note 2 Operation During Error Detection Detection Deceler Coast to Continue During ate to Stop Stop Operation Operation Error Error Warning Parameter Detection Notel Set the input level to detect errors using either signal ON or signal OFF NO contact External error when ON NC contact External error when OFF 2 Set the detection method to detect errors using either parameter detection or detection during operation parameter detection Detects while power is supplied to the Inverter Detection during operation Detects only during Inverter operation 6 49 Monitor Parameters Using the Analog Monitor Parameters This section explains the analog monitor parameters B Related Parameters Name LCD Display Monitor selection terminal FM Terminal FM Sel Description Sets the number of the monitor item to be outpu
238. o 7 Set Value 4 Set Value 5 Set Value 6 Set Value 7 13 25 50 Hz High startup torque Set value 8 to b Set Value 8 Set Value 9 Set Value A Set Value B Set Value C to D Set Value D 60 90 Hz 60 120 Hz 6 6 Individual Functions 2 2 to 45 kW V f Pattern The diagrams show characteristics for a 200 V class motor For a 400 V class motor multiply all voltages by 2 Parameter Torque Characteristics Set Value 0 to 3 Set Value 1 Set Value 2 Set Value 3 50 60 Hz 60 72 Hz Set Value 5 Set Value 6 Set Value 7 13 25 50 Hz 413 25 50 Hz High Startup Torque Set Value 8 to b Set Value 8 Set Value 9 Set Value A Set Value B Set Value C to D Set Value D 60 90 Hz e f 55 to 160 kW V f Pattern The diagrams show characteristics for a 200 V class motor For a 400 V class motor multiply all voltages by 2 Parameter Torque Characteristics Set Value 0 to 3 Set Value 1 Set Value 2 Set Value 3 Wl i 1 3 2 5 50 Hz 50 60 Hz Decrement Torque Characteristics Set Value 4 to 7 Set Value 4 Set Value 5 Set Value 6 Set Value 7 413 25 50 Hz High Startup Torque Set Value 8 to b Set Value 8 Set Value 9 Set Value A Set Value B 0 132 5 50 Hz Set Value C to D Set Value D 60 12
239. o input voltage 11 15 22 Max output voltage V Output ratings Max output frequency Hz Rated voltage V Rated frequency Hz Allowable voltage fluctua tion 120 Hz max 3 phase 200 208 220 230 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 10 15 Allowable frequency fluc tuation Power supply characteristics DC reactor Optional Measures for power supply harmonics 12 phase rec tification Not possible Possible Control characteristics Model Number 3G3PV Max applicable motor output kW Rated output capacity kVA Rated output current A 115 145 180 215 283 346 3 phase 200 208 220 230 or 240 VAC Proportional to input voltage 37 45 55 75 90 44 23 69 82 110 130 Max output voltage V Output ratings Max output frequency Hz Rated voltage V Rated frequency Hz Allowable voltage fluctua tion 120 Hz max 3 phase 200 208 220 230 240 VAC 50 60 Hz 1096 1596 Allowable frequency fluc tuation Power supply characteristics DC reactor Built in Measures for power supply harmonics 12 phase rec tification Control characteristics The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4 pole OMRON motor When selecting the actual motor and Inverter be sure that the Inverter s rated current is applicable for
240. on contact input 3 Terminal 55 Sel Terminal S6 nction selec tion Multi function contact input 4 Terminal S6 Sel Terminal S7 nction selec tion Multi function contact input 5 Terminal S7 Sel The values in parentheses indicate initial values when initialized in 3 wire sequence Multi function Digital Input Functions Function 3 wire sequence Forward Reverse Run command Local Remote selection ON Operator OFF parameter setting Option Inverter selection ON Option Card Multi step speed reference 1 When H3 05 is set to 0 this function is combined with the master auxiliary speed switch Multi step speed reference 2 Jog frequency command higher priority than multi step speed reference Accel decel time 1 External baseblock NO NO contact Baseblock at ON External baseblock NC NC contact Baseblock at OFF Not used Set when a terminal is not used FJOG command ON Forward run at jog frequency 41 17 Fault reset Reset when turned ON PI control disable ON PI control disabled Parameters write enable ON parameters can be written in OFF parameters other than frequency monitor are write protected 5 20 Parameter Tables Function Analog frequency reference sample hold External fault Desired settings possible Input mode NO contact NC contact Detection mode No
241. ons 1 14 Removing Attaching the Digital Operator and Front Cover Fig 1 14 Mounting the Digital Operator 3 1 Do not remove or attach the Digital Operator or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than those described above otherwise the Inverter may break or malfunction due to imperfect contact 2 Never attach the front cover to the Inverter with the Digital Operator attached to the front cover Imperfect contact can result IMPORTANT Always attach the front cover to the Inverter by itself first and then attach the Digital Operator to the front cover a Inverters of 22 kW or More For Inverters with an output of 22 kW or more remove the terminal cover and then use the following proce dures to remove the Digital Operator and main cover iRemoving the Digital Operator Use the same procedure as for Inverters with an output of 18 5 kW or less iRemoving the Front Cover Lift up at the location label 1 at the top of the control circuit terminal card in the direction of arrow 2 f N N W WS NW y V M 7 ANN qi e VS N V AC 73 FJ SW Fig 1 15 Removing the Front Cover Model 3G3PV B2220 E Shown Above E Attaching the Front Cover After completing required work such as mounting an optional card or setting the terminal card attach the front cover by reversing the procedure to remove
242. ontrol P control Time Fig 6 42 PI Control Operation EPI Control Applications The following table shows examples of PI control applications using the Inverter Applica Example of tion onto petala Sensor Used Feeds back machinery speed information and matches speed to the target value Inputs speed information from other machinery as the target value and performs synchronous control using the actual speed feedback Tachometer genera tor Speed Con trol Pressure Control Feeds back pressure information and performs parameter pressure control Pressure sensor Flow Rate Control Feeds back flow rate information and controls the flow rate highly accurately Flow rate sensor Tempera ture Con trol Feeds back temperature information and performs temperature adjustment control by Thermocouple rotating the fan Thermistor e 65 BRelated Parameters Name Paramo EE eter Description Seilg eus Number LCD Display Range Setting PI control mode selection 0 Disabled 1 Enabled PI Mode Proportional gain P P gain P Sets P control proportional i PI Gain P control is not performed when the setting is 0 00 25 00 Integral 1 time Sets I control integral time 0 0 to PI I Time I control is not performed when the setting is 0 0 360 0 1 0s Integral 1 limit Sets the I control limit as a percentage of the maximum 0 0 to PI I Limit out
243. operation prevents the motor from stalling by automatically lowering the Inverter s output frequency when a transient overload occurs while the motor is operating at a constant speed If the Inverter output current continues to exceed the setting in parameter L3 06 for 100 ms or longer the motor speed is reduced Set the enable or disable deceleration time using parameter L3 05 Set the decelera tion time using C1 02 Deceleration time 1 or C1 04 Deceleration Time 2 If the Inverter output current reaches the set value in L3 06 2 the motor will accelerate again to the set fre quency B Related Parameters Name Param eter Description Number LCD Display Setting Factory Access Range Setting Level Stall prevention selec 0 Disabled Operates according to the setting Motor tion during running func may stall when the load is large tion selection 1 Enabled Deceleration time 1 Stall prevention func tion during operation deceleration time is set in 1 02 StallP Run Sel 2 Enabled Deceleration time 2 Stall prevention func tion during operation deceleration time is set in 1 04 Stall prevention level A Enabled when L3 05 is set to 1 or 2 Set as a percentage during running taking Inverter rated current to be 100 Normally there is no need to make this setting 30 to 200 Lower the set value if the motor stalls at the factory set StallP Run Level ting
244. or Unit The motor may not stop within the deceleration time if this setting is not changed Forward run command forward run when ON Reverse run command reverse run when ON Wiring Examples Using a Braking Unit and Three Braking Resistor Units in Parallel This example shows wiring for using three Braking Resistor Units in parallel Thermal Thermal Thermal protector protector protector 1 2 Braking 4 jum s Braking A sequence is required to turn OFF the A it ur Doc power supply for the thermal overload relay 218 HI B 523 trip contacts of the Braking Resistor Unit B Braking Unit Thermal switch MCCB 2 2 Motor ont BR 43 R L1 Um 3 phase power 777 Inverter 380 to 480 V 50 S S L2 v T2 8 IM 60 Hz UT Y T L3 W T3 5 Voltage a M cooling Fan THRX OFF _ON ee 480 460 440 N MC j O OPE EON We TL eee 1 ah SA Overload relay trip ac T of Braking Resistor Unit 9 415 400 380V Ground to 10 Q max SA TRX 5 O a m m 1 SA TRX TES ce mcer MA Fault contact output Fault contacts I MB Forward Run Stop wn Forward run command NIG O Oet 1 forward run when ON Reverse Run Stop a 52 Reverse run command Braking Unit reverse run when ON A ange External fault zaj is it AY Disable stall prevention during deceleration by sett
245. or inspections The voltage remaining in the capacitor may cause elec tric shock Motor Application Precautions m Motor Application Precautions Using the Inverter for an Existing Standard Motor When a standard motor is operated by the Inverter power loss is slightly higher than when operated by a com mercial power supply Observe the following precautions when using an Inverter for an existing standard motor Speed Range Cooling effects diminish in the low speed range resulting in an increase in the motor temperature Therefore the motor torque should be reduced in the low speed range whenever using a motor not mabe by OMRON If 100 torque is required continuously at low speed consider using a special inverter or vector motor minstallation Withstand Voltage If the input voltage is high 440 V or higher or the wiring distance is long the motor insulation voltage must be considered Contact your OMRON representative for details iBHigh speed Operation When using the motor at a high speed 50 Hz or more problems may arise in dynamic balance and bearing durability Contact your OMRON representative for details i Torque Characteristics The motor may require more acceleration torque when the motor is operated with the Inverter than when oper ated with a commercial power supply Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be used with the motor to set a proper V f pattern i Vibration The In
246. or protection and torque limit It is an input data for autotuning Motor Rated FLA Motor protection selec Set to enable or disable the motor overload protection tion function using the electronic thermal relay 0 Disabled 1 General motor protection With applications where the power supply is often turned ON and OFF there is a risk that the circuit cannot be pro MOL Fault Select tected even if this parameter has been set to 1 as the ther mal value will be reset If multiple motors are connected to one Inverter set this parameter to 0 and install a thermal relay in each motor Motor protection time parameter Set the electronic thermal detection time in minutes Normally there is no need to make this setting The factory setting is resistance at 150 for 1 min If the motor overload resistance is clear set the overload resistance protection time during hot start to suit the motor MOL Time Const 1 Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity The shown values are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW 2 The settings range is 10 to 200 of the Inverter rated output current The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW Multi Function Outputs H2 01 and H2 02 Function Motor overload OL1 including OH3 pre alarm ON 90 or more of the detection level lSetting Motor Rated Current Set the rated current value on the motor nameplate in paramet
247. orque stability at frequencies near or above motor rated frequency Decreasing the voltage means decreasing the maximum torque in the same percentage However if the voltage is decreased only during speed agree then the rated torque can be kept during acceleration and deceleration 6 28 Improved Operating Efficiency Hunting prevention Function The hunting prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load B Related Parameters Nam Param ame eter LCD Description Number Display Factory Setting Hunting prevention 0 Hunting prevention function disabled function selection 1 Hunting prevention function enabled The hunting prevention function suppresses hunting when the motor is operating with a light load Hunt Prev Select If high response is to be given priority over vibration sup pression disable the hunting prevention function Hunting prevention gain Set the hunting prevention gain multiplication factor Normally there is no need to make this setting Make the adjustments as follows If vibration occurs with light load increase the setting Ifthe motor stalls reduce the setting If the setting is too large the voltage will be too sup pressed and the motor may stall 0 00 to 2 50 Hunt Prev Gain 6 29 achine Protection Preventing Motor Stalling During Operation Stall prevention during
248. output at the multi function outputs H2 01 to H2 03 When an alarm occurs take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below Table 7 2 Alarm Displays and Processing Display Meaning Forward Reverse Run Commands Input Together Both the forward and reverse run com mands have been ON for more than 0 55 Probable causes Corrective Actions Check the sequence of the forward and reverse run commands Since the rotational direction is unknown the motor will be deceler ated to a stop when this minor fault occurs Main Circuit Undervoltage The following conditions occurred when there was no Run signal The main circuit DC voltage was below the Undervoltage Detection Level Setting L2 05 The surge current limiting contactor opened The control power supply voltage when below the CUV level See causes for UV1 UV2 faults in the previous table See corrective actions for UV1 UV2 and UV3 faults in the previous table Main Circuit Overvoltage The main circuit DC voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level 200 V class Approx 400 V 400 V class Approx 800 V The power supply voltage is too high Decrease the voltage so it s within specifications Cooling Fin Overheating The temperature of the Inverter s cool ing fin exceeded the setting in L8 02 The ambient temperature is too high Install a cooling unit There is a heat source nearby Remove t
249. p frequency according to the following formula 43 01 gt 43 02 gt d3 03 gt Analog input When parameters 43 01 to 43 03 are set to 0 Hz the jump frequency function is disabled 6 25 Speed Limit Frequency Reference Limit Function Limiting Maximum Output Frequency If you do not want the motor to rotate above a given frequency use parameter d2 01 Set the upper limit value of the Inverter output frequency as a percentage taking E1 04 Maximum Output Frequency to be 100 B Related Parameters Name Param Name i inti Setting Factory eter T Description pd wis e PES Frequency reference upper limit Ref Upper Limit 0 0 to Set the output frequency upper limit taking the 110 0 max output frequency to be 100 100 0 Limiting Minimum Frequency If you do not want the motor to rotate at below a given frequency use parameters d2 02 or d2 03 There are two methods of limiting the minimum frequency as follows Adjust the minimum level for all frequencies Adjust the minimum level for the master speed frequency i e the lower levels of the jog frequency multi step speed frequency and auxiliary frequency will not be adjusted BRelated Parameters Name Setting Factory Param Range Setting eter NER LCD Display Frequency reference lower limit Ref Lower Master speed reference lower limit Ref1 Lower Limit Set the output frequenc
250. pera tion continues after overtorque warning Undertorque detected conti nuously during operation ope ration continues after overtorque warning Undertorque detection only with speed agreement output stopped upon detection pro tected operation Undertorque detected conti nuously during operation out put stopped upon detection protected operation Det 1 Sel Torque detec tion level 1 Inverter rated current is set as 100 0 to 300 Torq Det 1 Lvl Torque detec tion time 1 Sets the overtorque undertorque Det1 detection time Time Hardware Protection L8 Nam Param ame eter LCD Description Number Display RS 422A 485 Register Setting Factory Access Range Setting Level Overheat pre Sets the detection temperature for alarm level the Inverter overheat detection pre alarm in C OH Pre alarm The pre alarm detects when the Lvl cooling fin temperature reaches the set value 5 30 LCD Display Operation selection after overheat pre alarm OH Pre alarm Sel Description Sets the operation for when the Inverter overheat pre alarm occurs 0 Decelerate to stop in decelera tion time C1 02 1 Coast to stop 2 Fast stop in fast stop time 1 09 3 Continue operation Monitor display only A fault will be given in setting 0 to 2 and a minor
251. peration OL3 lit Undertorque detection only with speed matching operation continues after overtorque warning UL3 flashes Undertorque detected continuously during operation operation continues after overtorque warning UL3 flashes Undertorque detection only with speed matching output stopped upon detection protected operation UL3 lit Set LED Indicator Function Overtorque Undertorque Value i Detection 1 Undertorque detected continuously during operation output stopped upon UL3 lit detection protected operation iSetting Example The following diagram shows the time chart for overtorque and undertorque detection Overtorque Detection Motor current L6 02 Overtorque detection 1 NO Overtorque detection disabled band is approximately 10 of the Inverter rated output current Undertorque Detection Motor current output torque L6 02 Overtorque detection 1 NO L6 03 Overtorque detection disabled band is approximately 10 of the Inverter rated output current 6 32 Machine Protection Motor Overload Protection You can protect the motor from overload using the Inverter s built in electronic thermal overload relay B Related Parameters Nam Param ame eter Description Number LCD Display Factory Control Setting Methods Motor rated current Set the motor rated current This set value becomes the base value for mot
252. phase 400VAC 400 V Class 3G3FV PDRT1 SIN DeviceNet Communications Card Fig 3 1 Options and Peripheral Devices Special Mounted Options Fan Unit Table 9 1 Options and Peripheral Devices Model number 3G3IV PFANLI Application Replacement fan for Inverters equipped with a cooling fan Replace the Cooling Fan when the fan replacement time has come or a cooling fan fault FAN alarm has been displayed Separately Installed Options Scaling Meter 110 Connects to a multi function analog output from the Inverter Used to display rotational speeds of motors line speeds etc in physical units Analog Operator stan dard with steel panels 3G3IV PJVOP96LI Allows frequency reference settings and ON OFF operation control to be performed by analog references from a remote location 50 m max Frequency counter specifications 75 Hz 150 Hz 220 Hz Analog Operator small plastic 3G3IV PJVOP95LI Allows frequency reference settings and ON OFF operation control to be performed by analog references from a remote location 50 m max Frequency counter specifications 60 120 Hz 90 180Hz Special Options Braking Unit 3G3IV PCDBRLIB Used with a Braking Resistor Unit to reduce the deceleration time of the motor Not required with Inverters of 7 5 kW or less for 200 V class Inverters or for Inverters of 15 kW or less for 400 V class Inverters Braking Resistor Unit 3G3IV P
253. power supply voltage is too high Decrease the voltage so it s within specifications Display Table 7 1 Fault Displays and Processing Continued Description Main Circuit Undervoltage The main circuit DC voltage is below the Undervoltage Detection Level L2 05 200 V class Approx 190 V 400 V class Approx 380 V Main Circuit MC Operation Failure The MC stopped responding during Inverter operation Applicable Inverter Capacities 200 V class 37 to 110 kW 400 V class 75 to 300 kW Protective and Diagnostic Functions Probable Causes An open phase occurred with the input power supply A momentary power loss occurred The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are too large A fault occurred in the surge pre vention circuit Corrective Actions Reset the fault after correcting its cause Control Power Fault The control power supply voltage dropped Try turning the power supply off and on Replace the Inverter if the fault continues to occur Inrush Prevention Circuit Fault Overheating occurred in the inrush resistor The MC did not respond for 10 s even though the MC ON signal has been output Applicable Inverter Capacities 200 V class 37 to 110 kW 400 V class 75 to 300 kW The MC in the main circuit failed The MC excitation coil is burned out Try turning the power supply off and on Replace
254. pply 400V class power supply m 3691 MOOR o 2 NSS Power supply input terminals CHARGE indicator Fig 4 2 Large capacity Inverter Connections Power ON Confirm all of the following items and then turn ON the power supply Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage 200 V class 3 phase 200 to 240 VDC 50 60 Hz 400 V class 3 phase 380 to 480 VDC 50 60 Hz Make sure that the motor output terminals U V W and the motor are connected correctly Make sure that the Inverter control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly Set all Inverter control circuit terminals to OFF Make sure that the motor is not connected to the mechanical system no load status Trial Operation Procedures Checking the Display Status If the Digital Operator s display at the time the power is connected is normal it will read as follows Display for normal operation The frequency reference monitor is dis played the data display section DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE When an fault has occurred the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display In that case refer to Chapter 7 The following display is an example of a display for faulty operation The display will differ depending on the Display for fault operation type of fault A low voltage alarm is shown at left DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE Basic Se
255. put frequency 100 0 PI limit Sets the limit after PI control as a percentage of the maxi 0 0 to PI Limit mum output frequency 100 0 100 0 100 0 PI offset adjustment 100 0 Sets the offset after PI control as a percentage of the maxi PI Offset mum outut frequency to 100 0 PI primary delay time parame ter Sets the time parameter for low pass filter for PI control 0 00 to outputs 10 00 0 00 s PI Delay Time Not usually necessary to set Selection of PI feedback com 0 No detection of loss of PI feedback mand loss detection 1 Detection of loss of PI feedback Operation continues during detection with the malfunctioning contact not operating 2 Detection of loss of PI feedback Coasts to stop during detection and fault contact oprates Fb loss Det Sel PI feedback command loss detection level Set the PI feedback loss detection level as a percent with the maximum output frequency at 100 00100 Fb loss Det Lvl PI feedback command loss detection time Sets the PI feedback loss detection level in s units Fb loss Det Time PI sleep function operation level Set the PI sleep function start level as a frequency PI Sleep Level PI sleep operation delay time 0 0 to 25 5 0 0 to 120 0 0 0 to 25 5 PI Sleep Time Set the delay time until the PI sleep function starts Accel decel time for PI refer ence Set the accel decel time fo
256. quency reference and frequency monitor 0 0 01 Hz units 0 01 Maximum output frequency is 100 2 to 39 rotation per minute rpm Sets the motor poles 0 to 39999 User desired display Set the desired values for setting and dis play for the max output frequency Set digit number excluding the decimal point Set the number of digits below the decimal point to display Example When the max output frequency value is 200 0 set 12000 LOCAL REMOTE key enable disable Local Remote Key Set the run method selection key LOCAL REMOTE Key function 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Switches between the Digital Operator and the parameter settings STOP Key during con trol circuit terminal oper ation Oper STOP Key Set the STOP Key in the run mode 0 Disabled When the run command is issued from an external terminal the Stop Key is disabled 1 Enabled Effective even during run User parameter initial value User Defaults Clears or stores user initial values 0 Stores not set 1 Begins storing Records the set parameters as user initial values 2 All clear Clears all recorded user initial values When the set parameters are recorded as user initial val ues 1110 will be set in A1 03 Frequency reference setting method selection Operator M O P When the frequency reference is set on the Digital Opera tor frequency reference monitor
257. r Doing so while the RUN signal is turned ON my result in injury Caution Be sure to confirm permissible ranges of motors and machines before opera tion because the Inverter speed can be easily changed from low to high Not doing so may result in damage to the product Caution Provide a separate holding brake when neccessary Not doing so may result in injury Caution Do not perform a signal check during operation Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product A A A A A A A A A Caution Do not carelessly change settings Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product Trial Operation Flowchart E Trial Operation Flowchart Perform trial operation according to the following flowchart When setting the basic parameters always set C6 01 Heavy Normal Duty Selection according to the application START Ne A Installation Wiring Set power supply voltage Turn ON power Confirm status Select operating Basic settings method Quick programming mode v Set E1 03 V f default 200V 50Hz 400V 50Hz nm over 0 m or heavy load possibly YES causing motor to stall or overload NO Y Stationary autotuning for line to line resistance only lt Application settings Advanced programming mode No load operation I
258. r PI reference pe PI Acc Dec Time Pulse train input function selection 0 Frequency reference 1 PI feedback value Pulse Input Sel 2 PI target value Name 2 Description Output Signal Level During LCD Display Multi Function Analog Output Pl feedback value Monitors the feedback value when PI control is used frequency 0 to 10 V PI Feedback The input for the max frequency corresponds to 100 PI input volume PI feedback volume frequency 0 to 10 V PI Input Given as maximum frequency 100 0 0196 PI output volume PI control output frequency 0 to 10 V PI Output Given as maximum frequency 100 0 0196 PI command PI command PI command bias PI Setpoint Given as maximum frequency 100 0 01 Individual Functions Multi Function Contact Inputs H1 01 to H1 05 Set o jr PI control disable ON PI control disabled 0 disable PI control disable ON PI control disabled 0 PI control disabled Multi Function Analog Input H3 09 Set PI feedback Max output frequency EPI Control Methods The PI control method can be enabled or disabled by setting parameter b5 01 Set Value Control Method E GEN PI disabled PI output becomes the Inverter output frequency PI Feedback Input Methods The multifunction analog input A2 can be used for PI control feedback input Therefore the parameter H3 09 Multi Funct
259. r power factor improvement lt DC reactor for power fal factor improvement Input noise filter Inverter Output noise filter Fig 2 1 Example Connections to Peripheral Devices 2 4 Connection Diagram The connection diagram of the Inverter is shown in Fig 2 2 When using the Digital Operator the motor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits DC reactor to improve input power factor optional ug GEOX Short circuit bar 2 B 3 phase power 410 20 mA 250 0 to 10 V 20 st ov 380 to 480 V Qw 50 60 Hz 5 5 2 T o Inverter i 3G3PV i Forward Run Stop Reverse Run Stop 1 i External fault 1 i Fault reset Multi function Multi stop speed gt contact inputs l a actory settin settings Multi step speed i setting 2 i gt Jog frequency selection 1 424 V 8 i PNP connection E Shield terminal Pulse train input requency setting adjustment i F 39 ov Frequency setting power Frequency 1 setter Frequency s setting power External rt 15V frequency 2kQ Master speed reference references H O to 10 V 20 H T Master speed H 5 422 485 communications Ground to 100 Q Ammeter adjustment gem j CY Lime bg Multifunction analog
260. r will be written and the monitor display will be returned to when the ENTER key is pressed after changing the setting Example Operations An example of key operations is given below for when the following settings have been changed from their default settings b1 01 Reference Selection C1 01 Acceleration Time 1 E1 01 Input Voltage Setting and E2 01 Motor Rated Current Mode Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display Verify Mode Fr quency reference Frequency reference selection 29 selection ADV VERIFY ATUNE g a p DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE Fig 3 7 Operations in Verify Mode 3 11 Autotuning Mode Autotuning automatically tunes and sets the required motorparameters when operating in the open loop or flux vector control modes Always perform autotuning before starting operation When the motor can not be disconnected from the load perform stationary autotuning Contact your dealer to set motorparameters by calculation The Inverter s autotuning function automatically determines the motor parameters while a servo system s autotuning function determines the size of a load so these autotunig functions are fundamentally different E Example of Operation Set the motor output power in kW and rated current specified on the nameplate on the motor and then press the RUN key The motor is automat
261. ration time in C1 02 1 Coast to stop fault detection 2 Decelerates to stop using Cl 09 deceleration time fault detection 3 Continuous operating alarm detection Setting Range Factory Setting Access Level RS 422A 485 Register Communica tions external fault input detection method selec tion EFO Detection 0 Fault detection during power ON 1 Fault detected during running only Communica tions external fault input operation selection EFO Fault Action 0 Deceleration to a stop using C1 02 deceleration time fault detection 1 Coast to stop fault detection 2 Decelerates to a stop using C1 09 deceleration time fault detection 3 Continuous operating alarm detection Display unit selection for Current moni tor Current Unit Sel Sets the unit of current monitor 0 Ampere 1 100 8192 Terminal Function Parameters The following settings are made with the terminal function parameters H parameters Settings for external terminal functions E Multi function Digital Inputs H1 Name Param __ eter LCD Description Number Display RS 422A 485 Register Setting Factory Access Range Setting Level Terminal S3 nction selec tion Multi function contact input 1 Terminal S3 Sel Terminal S4 nction selec tion Multi function contact input 2 Terminal S4 Sel Terminal 55 nction selec tion Multi functi
262. red at the Inverter output A short or ground fault can be caused by motor burn damage worn insu lation or a damaged cable The load is too large or the accelera tion deceleration time is too short A special purpose motor or motor with a capacity too large for the Inverter is being used A magnetic switch was switched at the Inverter output Corrective Actions Reset the fault after correcting its cause Ground Fault The ground fault current at the Inverter output exceeded approxi mately 5046 of the Inverter rated out put current A ground fault occurred at the Inverter output A ground fault can be caused by motor burn damage worn insula tion or a damaged cable Reset the fault after correcting its cause Fuse Blown The fuse in the main circuit is blown The output transistor has failed because of a short circuit or ground fault at the Inverter output Check whether there is a short circuit between the following terminals A short circuit will damage the output transistor U V W U V W Replace the Inverter after correct ing the cause Main Circuit Overvoltage The main circuit DC voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level 200 V class Approx 410 V 400 V class Approx 820 V The deceleration time is too short and the regenerative energy from the motor is too large Increase the deceleration time or connect a Braking Resistor Unit and Braking Unit The
263. rier Frequency Proportional Gain C6 05 6 and C6 03 C6 04 11 Data setting error will occur ll Carrier Frequency and Inverter Overload Current Level When using a 200 V Class Inverter 30 to 110 kW or a 400 V Class Inverter for 30 to 160 kW with a carrier fre quency higher than 10 kHz the Inverter overload level will be reduced Even when the overload current is below 120 in this case an OL2 Inverter overload will be detected The Inverter overload current reduction level is shown below Overload Current Reduction Level 100 50 0 5 kHz 10 kHz 15 kHz Fig 6 2 Overload Current Reduction Level 6 4 Frequency Reference This section explains how to input the frequency reference Selecting the Frequency Reference Source Set parameter b1 01 to select the frequency reference source Related Parameters Nam Param ame eter Description Number Setting Factory Access LCD Display Range Setting Level Set the frequency reference source 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal analog input Reference Source 2 RS 422A 485 communications 3 Option Card Reference selection Input the Reference Frequency from the Digital Operator When b1 01 is set to 0 you can input the reference frequency from the Digital Operator For details on setting the reference frequency refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes Fig6 3 Frequency Setting D
264. rmal during operation PI soft starter External search command 1 ON Speed search from maximum output frequency External search command 2 ON Speed search from set frequency Field weakening command ON Field weakening control set for d6 01 and d6 02 External speed search command 3 Communications test mode High slip braking HSB Jog Frequency 2 Drive enable B Multi function Digital Outputs H2 Name Change Setting Factory during Access Range Setting Opera Level tion Paran ccr NN eter LCD Description Number Display RS 422A 485 Register Terminal M1 M2 function selection Multi function contact output 1 Term M1 M2 Sel Terminal M3 M4 function selection Multi function contact output 2 Term M3 M4 Sel Multi function Digital Output Functions Setting Value Function During run ON run command is ON or voltage is being output Zero speed Frequency agree 1 L4 02 used Desired frequency agree 1 ON Output frequency L4 01 L4 02 used and during frequency agree Frequency F OUT detection 1 ON L4 01 gt output frequency 2 L4 01 L4 02 used Frequency F OUT detection 2 ON Output frequency gt L4 01 or output frequency lt L4 01 L4 02 used Inverter operation ready READY After initialization no faults During DC bus undervoltage UV detection During baseblock
265. rollers Fig 2 7 Correct Power supply Noise Filter Installation 2 16 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Incorrect Noise Filter Installation 3G3PV Power supply MCCB 5 Inverter urpose L controllers noise filte P suppl ower supply MCCB 3G3PV pem General 5 OM verter Do not use general purpose noise filters No general MCCB purpose noise filter can effectively suppress noise enerated from the Inverter Other 5 controllers Fig 2 8 Incorrect Power supply Noise filter Installation E Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits Connecting the Inverter and Motor Connect output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 to motor lead wires U V and W respectively Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward run command Switch over any two of the output termi nals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward run command Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals Never connect a power supply to output terminals U T1 V T2 and W T3 If voltage is applied to the output terminals the internal circuits of the Inverter will be damaged Never Short or Ground Output Terminals If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the Inverter cas ing an electric shock or grounding wil
266. roperly Turn off the power and insert the Card again The Inverter or Option Card is faulty Replace the Option Card or the Inverter ASIC internal RAM fault Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter Watchdog timer fault Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter CPU ASIC mutual diagnosis fault Try turning the power supply off and on again The control circuit is damaged Replace the Inverter ASIC version fault The Inverter control circuit is faulty Replace the Inverter Communications Option Card A D converter error The Option Card is not connected properly Turn off the power and insert the Card again The Option Card s A D converter is faulty Replace the Communications Option Card Communications Option Card self diagnostic error Communications Option Card model code error Communications Option Card DPRAM error Communications Option Card fault Replace the Option Card Protective and Diagnostic Functions Alarm Detection Alarms are detected as a type of Inverter protection function that does not operate the fault contact output The system will automatically return to its original status once the cause of the alarm has been removed The Digital Operator display flashes and the alarm is
267. ror 1 Error set using H1 01 Bit 5 Error reset 1 Reset command set using H1 02 Bits 6 to B Not used Bit C Multi function contact input terminal S5 input Bit D Multi function contact input terminal S6 input Bit E Multi function contact input terminal S7 input BitF Not used Frequency ref erence 30000 100 Note Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously BENTER Command When writing parameters to the Inverter from the PLC using RS 422A 485 communications the parameters are temporarily stored in the parameter data area in the Inverter To enable these parameters in the parameter data area use the ENTER command There are two types of ENTER commands ENTER commands that enable parameter data in RAM and ENTER commands that write data to EEPROM non volatile memory in the Inverter at the same time as enabling data in RAM The following table shows the ENTER command data ENTER command data can only be written The ENTER command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0901H Register No Write parameter data to EEPROM Parameter data is not written to EEPROM but refreshed in RAM only execute ENTER commands 0900H written to EEPROM The ENTER command registers are write only Consequently if reading these registers the register address INFO will become invalid Error code 02H Aa The maximum number of time
268. rrent sensitivity of 200 mA minimum and an operating time of 0 1 s minimum to prevent operating errors The interrupter must be suitable for high frequency operation Example NV series by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation manufactured in or after 1988 EG SG series by Fuji Electric Co Ltd manufactured in or after 1984 Options and Peripheral Devices Options and Peripheral Devices There are several types of options and peripheral devices for Inverters Separately installed options spe cial options Option Cards and recommended separately installed options The specifications of these options are provided in these sections Separately Installed Options Special Options K3TJ V110 3G3HV PUZDABO Scaling Meter 3G3IV PCDBROB Braking Resistor Unit DC Reactor Braking Unit 3G3IV PJVOP960 3G3IV PJVOP950 3G3FV PCNO26 E Digital Operator Analog Operator Analog Operator Digital Operator 3G3IV PJVOP161 LED standard steel panels small plastic Connection Cable 3G3IV PJVOP160 LCD Recommended Separately Installed Options j N Recommended Separately Installe Options P up llli ye Simple Input Noise Filter j IH Hi n i jl 3G3IV PUZBABLI AC Reactor Ji 3G3IV PLFO Output Noise Filter uj 3GS3IV PFN Input Noise Filter 3 phase inductive Power supply 3 phase 200VAC 200 V Class Option cards 3
269. rter output voltage to normal voltage at the completion of a speed search Sets the time required to recover from 0 V to the maximum voltage The factory setting will change when the control method is changed Open loop vector control factory settings are given 2 Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW Continuing Operation Multi function Contact Inputs Function latest Level External search command 1 peed search disabled Start from lowest output frequency ON Speed estimation Estimate the motor speed and start search from estimated speed Current detection Start speed search from maximum output frequency External search command 3 OFF Speed search disabled Start from lowest output frequency ON Speed estimation Estimate the motor speed and start search from estimated speed Same operation as external search command 1 Current detection Start speed search from output frequency reference frequency when search command was input External search command 2 OFF Speed search disabled Start from lowest output frequency ON Speed estimation Estimate the motor speed and start search from estimated speed Same operation as external Yes search command 1 3 etection Start speed search from set frequency reference frequency when search command was ll Setting Precautions When both external search co
270. rts when power returns during control operati ons Does not detect main cir cuit undervoltage Momentary 2 powerloss Ridethrough time when Momen ridethru time tary Power Loss Selection L2 bs ee 01 is set to 1 in units of seconds ru f Sets the Inverter s minimum base Min base block time block time when the Inverter is restarted after power loss ride through Sets the time to approximately 0 7 times the motor secondary PwrL Base Circuit time parameter block t When an overcurrent or overvolt age occurs when starting a speed search or DC injection braking increase the set values Voltage recov Sets the time required to return erytime the Inverter output voltage to nor mal voltage at the completion of a speed search Sets the time required to recover from 0 V to the maximum volt age PwrL V F Ramp t Undervoltage Sets the main circuit undervolt detection level age UV detection level main circuit DC voltage Usually changing this setting is not necessary PUVDet Insert an AC reactor in the Level Inverter input side to lower the main circuit undervoltage detec tion level 1 The factory setting depends upon the Inverter capacity The value for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW is given 2 These are values for a 200 V class Inverter Value for a 400 V class Inverter is double 5 27 5 28 Stall Prev
271. s 3GS3RV PFI MOUNTING INSTRUCTIONS Installation position E Caution Observe 60 mm space for id cooling slots 60 mm 1 M e Protect filter from liquids dust and ENS E aggressive gases Wall mounting correct Mount the filter as close as possible to the inverter short wire connec tions Floor mounting correct Incorrect o 24 Options and Peripheral Devices Input Noise Filters for EMC Directives 3G3RV PFIO by Rasmi Electronics When conformance to the EMC Directives in the EC Directives is required always use one of these Filters The Filter is connected between the Inverter s power supply input terminals R L1 S L2 T L3 and the power supply There are holes for mounting the Noise Filters to Inverters on the top of the Noise Filters Use these holes to secure the Noise Filters to the Inverters Models and Application The standard models of Input Noise Filters for EMC Directives are listed in the following table Inverter Input Noise Filter for EMC Directives Voltage Class 3 phase 200 VAC Max Applicable Motor Capacity kW Rated Cur rent A Model No 3G3RV PFI3010 E 3G3RV PFI3018 E 3G3RV PFI2035 E 3G3RV PFI2060 E 3G3RV PFI2100 E Dimensions Diagram 3G3RV PFI2130 E 3G3RV PFI2160 E 3G3RV PFI2200 E 3 phase 400 VAC 3G3RV PFI3010 E
272. s and Application The standard models of Fan Units are listed in the following table Inverter Replacement Cooling Fan Voltage Class 3 phase 200 VAC Max Applicable Motor Capacity Model No 3G3PV A2004 3G3PV A2007 3G3PV A2015 3G3PV A2022 Model No Qty Used 3G3PV A2037 3G3PV A2055 3G3PV A2075 3G3PV A2110 3G3IV PFANO001041 3G3PV A2150 3G3PV A2185 3G3IV PFANO001042 3G3PV B2220 3G3PV B2300 3G3IV PFANO001039 3G3PV B2370 3G3PV B2450 3G3IV PFANO001049 3G3PV B2550 3G3PV B2750 3G3IV PFANO001052 3G3PV B2900 3G3PV B21IK 3G3IV PFANO00111 3 phase 400 VAC 3G3PV A4004 3G3PV A4007 3G3PV A4015 No Fan 3G3PV A4022 3G3PV A4037 3G3PV A4055 3G3IV PFANO001041 3G3PV A4075 3G3PV A4110 3G3PV A4150 3G3PV A4185 3G3IV PFANO001042 3G3PV B4220 3G3PV B4300 3G3IV PFANO001039 3G3PV B4370 3G3PV B4450 3G3PV B4550 3G3IV PFANO001044 3G3PV B4750 3G3PV B4900 3G3IV PFANO001052 3G3PV B411K 3G3PV B413K 3G3PV B416K 3G3IV PFANO001056 Refer to Chapter 6 Maintenance and Inspection for the Fan Unit replacement procedure 9 10 Separately Installed Options The separately installed options include Scaling Meters and Analog Operators B Scaling Meters A Scaling Meter is attached to a mu
273. s attached to the top panel inside the Inverter The cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Inverter from the installation panel Removing the Cooling Fan Remove the terminal cover Inverter cover Digital Operator and front cover from the front of the Inverter 2 Remove the controller bracket to which the cards are mounted Remove all cables connected to the con troller 3 Remove the cooling fan power cable connectors CN26 and CN27 from the gate driver positioned at the back of the controller 4 Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Inverter 5 Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover Mounting the Cooling Fan After attaching a new cooling fan reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket be sure that the air flow faces the top of the Inverter Air flow direction _ Fan cover Fig 8 2 Cooling Fan Replacement Inverters of 22 kW or More Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card The control circuit terminal card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the cables 2 Always confirm that the charge indicator is not lit before removing or mounting the control circuit terminal P card IMPORTANT Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card 1 Remove the Digital Operator and front cover 2 Remove the connecting line connectors connected to FE and NC on the control c
274. s maximum frequency 100 10 V Max frequency 0 to 10 V possible PI command PI Setpoint PI command PI command bias Given as maximum frequency 100 10 V Max frequency RS 422A 485 communica tions error code Transmit Err Shows RS 422A 485 errors Ut38 n t3 CRC error L 1 Data length error Not used always 0 1 Parity error Overrun error Framing error Timeout Not used always 0 Cannot be output Cooling fan operating time FAN Elapsed Time Monitors the total operating time of the cooling fan The time can be set in 02 10 Cannot be output The unit is set in 01 03 frequency units of reference setting and monitor 5 39 B Fault Trace U2 Name LCD Diplay Current fault Current Fault Description The content of the current fault Previous fault Last Fault The content of the error that occurred just prior to the current fault Reference fre quency at fault Frequency Ref The reference frequency when the previous fault occurred Output fre quency at fault Output Freq The output frequency when the previous fault occurred Output cur rent at fault Output Cur rent The output current when the pre vious fault occurred Output volt age reference at fault Output Volt age The output refere
275. s you can write to EEPROM using the Inverter is 100 000 Do not frequently 6 62 Individual Functions Error Codes The following table shows RS 422A 485 communications error codes Error Code Contents Function code error A function code other than 03H 08H or 10H has been set by the PLC Invalid register number error The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere With broadcast sending a start address other than 0000 0001H or 0002H has been set Invalid quantity error The number of data packets being read or written is outside the range 1 to 16 n write mode the number of data packets in the message is not No of packets x 2 Data setting error A simple upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing parame ters When writing parameters the parameter setting is invalid Write mode error Attempting to write parameters to the inverter during operation Attempting to write via ENTER commands during operation Attempting to write parameters other than A1 00 to A1 05 E1 03 or 02 04 when warning alarm CPF03 defective EEPROM has occurred Attempting to write read only data Writing during main circuit undervoltage UV error Writing parameters to the inverter during UV main circuit undervoltage alarm Writing via ENTER commands during UV main circuit undervoltage alarm Writing error during parameters proce
276. speed frequency reference 2kQ AC Analog common OFF ON iB DIP switch S1 2 Fig 6 5 Master Auxiliary Frequency Reference Input Setting Precautions When inputting a voltage signal to terminal A2 observe the following precautions Turn OFF pin 2 on DIP switch S1 for switching between voltage and current factory setting is ON The parameter H3 08 has to be set to 0 BInputting Frequency Reference Using Current When b1 01 is set to 1 you can input the frequency reference from control circuit terminal A2 Input the cur rent 4 to 20 mA in control circuit terminal A2 When H3 09 Multi Function Analog Input Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection is set to 0 factory setting he input on A2 is added to Al Fig 6 6 Frequency Reference Using Current Inverter V Power supply 15 V 20 mA Q A1 Auxiliary speed frequency reference A2 Master speed frequency reference 4 to 20 mA input Q AC Analog common DIP switch S1 i Setting Precautions When inputting a current signal to terminal A2 turn ON pin 2 on DIP switch S1 factory setting ON The parameter H3 08 has to be set to 2 4 20 mA input f using terminal A2 to input the master speed reference and terminal A1 to input the auxiliary frequency reference set H3 13 Terminal A1 A2 Switching to 1 Using Multi Step Speed Operation With SYSDRIVE PV series Inverters you can change the speed to a maximum o
277. splayed on the Digital Operator and the write operation will be stopped e 83 E Writing parameter Set Values Stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter COPY To write parameter set values stored in the Digital Operator to the Inverter make the settings using the follow ing method Table 6 3 COPY Function Procedure Digital Operator Display eevee DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY A TUNE Explanation Press the MENU key and select advanced pro gramming mode Press the ENTER key and select the parameters monitor display Display 03 01 Copy Function Selection using the Increment key and Decrement key DRIVE QUICK ADV VERIFY ATUNE Press the ENTER key and select the parameters setting display Change the set value to 2 using the Increment Key Set the changed data using the ENTER key The COPY function will start If the COPY function ends normally End is dis played on the Digital Operator Parameter 03 01 is automatically reset to 0 and then the dis play returns to 03 01 If an error is displayed set the parameters again Error displays and their descriptions are shown below Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Function Error Display Description Inverter product code and Inverter software number are different Inverter capacity with which you are trying to copy and the Inverter capacity stored in the Digital Operator are different The Invert
278. ssing Attempting to write parameters while processing parameters in the Inverter iSlave Not Responding In the following cases the slave will ignore the write function When a communications error overrun framing parity or CRC 16 is detected in the command message When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Inverter do not agree When the data that configures the message and the data time length exceeds 24 bits When the command message data length is invalid Application Precautions If the slave address specified in the command message is 0 all slaves execute the write function but do not return response messages to the master INFO e 63 iMSelf Diagnosis The Inverter has a built in function for self diagnosing the operations of serial communications interface cir cuits This function is called the self diagnosis function The self diagnosis function connects the communica tions parts of the send and receive terminals receives the data sent by the Inverter and checks if communications are being performed normally Perform the self diagnosis function using the following procedure 1 Qe X UPS Turn ON the power supply to the Inverter and set 67 communications test mode in parameter H1 05 Terminal S7 Function Selection Turn OFF the power supply to the Inverter Perform wiring according to the following diagram while the power supply is turned OFF Turn ON the termi
279. t 01 00 at terminal FM 4 10 to 14 28 34 39 40 cannot be set Setting Range Factory Setting Gain terminal FM Terminal FM Gain Sets the multi function analog output 1 FM voltage level gain Sets whether the monitor item output will be output in multiples of 10 V The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V A meter calibration function is available 0 100 100 Bias terminal FM Terminal FM Bias Sets the multi function analog output 1 voltage level bias Sets output characteristic up down parallel movement as a percentage of 10 V The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V A meter calibration function is available 110 0 110 0 Monitor selection terminal AM Terminal AM Sel Sets the number of the monitor item to be output U1 OD from terminal AM 4 10 to 14 28 34 39 40 cannot be set Gain terminal AM Terminal AM Gain Set the voltage level gain for multi function analog output 2 Set the number of multiples of 10 V to be output as the 100 output for the monitor items The maimum output from the terminal is 10 V A meter calibration function is available 0 100 Bias terminal AM Terminal AM Bias Set the multi function analog output 2 voltage level bias Sets output characteristic up down parallel movement as a percentage of 10 V The maximum output from the terminal is 10 V A meter calibration function is available 110
280. t as a percentage of the max output frequency Parameter Tables Bi Jump Frequencies d3 1 i RS 422A LCD Description SR cee 485 Display Register Jump fre quency 1 Jump Freq 1 Set the center values of the jump frequencies in Hz This function is disabled by set Jump fre tingthe jump frequency to 0 Hz quency 2 Always ensure that the following applies d3 01 gt 43 02 43 03 Operation in the jump frequency range is prohibited but during acceleration and deceleration the sump ne speed changes smoothly without quency 3 jumping Jump Freq 3 Sets the jump frequency band 43 04 width in Hz Jump The jump frequency range will be Bandwidth the jump frequency d3 04 iField Weakening d6 d3 01 d3 02 d3 03 Name RS 422A Y Setting Factory Access LCD Description 485 Display RES Slug Laval Register Set the Inverter output voltage Field weaken when the field weakening com ing level mand is input It is enabled when the field weak ening command is set for a multi function input Set the level as a percentage tak ing the voltage set in the V f pat tern as 100 Field Weak Lvl Field fre Set the lower limit in Hz of the quency frequency range where field con trol is valid The field weakening command is CORNER valid only at frequencies above Freq this setting and only when the speed is in agreement with the curr
281. t of Ist last fault Second last fault Fault Mes sage 2 The error content of 2nd last fault Third last fault Fault Mes sage 3 The error content of 3rd last fault Fourth last fault Fault Mes sage 4 The error content of 4th last fault Cumulative operation time at fault Elapsed Time 1 The total operating time when the 1st last fault occurred Accumulated time of sec ond fault Elapsed Time 2 The total operating time when the 2nd last fault occurred Accumulated time of third fault Elapsed Time 3 The total operating time when the 3rd last fault occurred Accumulated time of fourth oldest fault Elapsed Time 4 The total operating time when the 4th last fault occurred Fifth last to 10th last faultt Fault Mes sage The error content of the 5th to 10th fault Accumulated time of fifth to tenth fault Elapsed Time Total generating time when 5th 10th pevious fault occured Output Signal Level During Multi Function Analog Output Cannot be output Note The following errors are not recorded in the error log CPF00 01 02 03 UV1 and UV2 Access Level RS 422A 485 Register 200 V and 400 V Class Inverters of 0 4 to 1 5 kW Factory Setting Parameter Tables 50 0 60 0 72 0 50 0 6 60 0 7 60 0 8 50 0 60 0
282. tching so high frequency leakage current is generated Therefore at the Inverter primary side use a ground fault interrupter to detect only the leakage current in the frequency range that is hazardous to humans and exclude high frequency leakage current For the special purpose ground fault interrupter for Inverters choose a ground fault interrupter with a sen sitivity amperage of at least 10 mA per Inverter When using a general ground fault interrupter choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amper age of 200 mA or more per Inverter and with an operating time of 0 1 s or more Installing a Magnetic Contactor If the power supply for the main circuit is to be shut off during a sequence a magnetic contactor can be used When a magnetic contactor is installed on the primary side of the main circuit to forcibly stop the Inverter however the regenerative braking does not work and the Inverter will coast to stop The Inverter can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor however may cause the Inverter to break down Start and stop the Inverter at most once every 30 minutes When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator automatic operation cannot be performed after recovery from a power interruption Ifa Braking Unit and a Braking Resistor Unit are used program the sequence so that the magnetic contac tor is
283. tected current sign was the oppo site of what it should be There is a phase fault for U V or W The torque reference exceeded 100 and the no load torque exceeded 70 during autotuning The rated current is set high Check the input data Check the capacity of the Inverter and motor Check the input data Check wiring and the machine Check the load Check the input data Check motor wiring If the motor is connected to the machine disconnect it Check the current detection circuit motor wiring current detector and installation methods Check and correct the settings Disconnect the load from the motor Check the input data particularly the motor output current and motor rated current Protective and Diagnostic Functions Errors when Using the Digital Operator Copy Function The errors that can occur when using the copy function from the Digital Operator are given in the following table An error code will be displayed on the Digital Operator If a Digital Operator key is pressed when an error code is being displayed the display will be cleared and 03 01 will be displayed The error contact output and alarm output will not function Display Table 7 5 Errors during Copy Function Meaning Digital Operator write protected Probable causes 03 01 was set to 1 to write a Parameter when the Digital Operator was write protected 03 02 0 Corrective Actions Set 03 02 to 1 to en
284. ter on Output Side Connect a noise filter to the output side of the Inverter to reduce radio noise and inductive noise MCCB 3G3PV 3G3IV PLF t a Inverter Filter IM 5 Radio noise Inductive Controller Inductive noise Electromagnetic induction generates noise on the signal line causing the controller to malfunction Radio noise Electromagnetic waves from the Inverter and cables cause the broadcasting radio receiver to make noise Powersupply Fig 2 9 Installing a noise filter on the output side Countermeasures against Inductive Noise As described previously a noise filter can be used to prevent inductive noise from being generated on the out put side Alternatively cables can be routed through a grounded metal pipe to prevent inductive noise Keep ing the metal pipe at least 30 cm away from the signal line considerably reduces inductive noise MCCB 3G3PV Metal pipe Power supply Signal line Fig 2 10 Countermeasures against Inductive noise 2 18 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Countermeasures Against Radio Interference Radio noise is generated from the Inverter as well as from the input and output lines To reduce radio noise install noise filters on both input and output sides and also install the Inverter in a totally enclosed steel box The cable between the Inverter and the motor should be as short as possible Power supply aaa E
285. ter to a Digital Operator in a remote locations Both 1 m and 3 m Cables are available 3631 V PCNL126 Models and Application Model No Specifications 3G3IV PCN126 Cable length 1 m 3G3IV PCN326 E Cable length 3 Personal computer Cable Connect the Inverter and the Personal Computer Only available in 3m Specifications 3G3IV PCN329 E Cable length 3 m iSoftware tool SYSDrive Configurator Software tool for programming downloading uploading and monitoring for OMRON Inverters Specifications 9950058 6 SYSDrive Configurator V1 2 B DC Reactor A DC Reactor is used to control harmonics generated by the Inverter It is more effective than and can be used in combination with an AC Reactor It is also used to increase the power factor Inverter DC Reactor Max Appli Rated Rated Voltage cable Motor Model No Voltage Current Inductance Class Capacity mH kW vy 0 4 0 75 3G3HV PUZDAB5 4A8MH 1 5 03 7 3G3HV PUZDAB18A3MH 5 5 7 5 3G3HV PUZDAB36A 1MH 200 V Class 3G3HV Dum PUZDAB72A0 5MH 3G3HV PUZDAB90A0 4MH 3G3HV PUZDAB3 2A28MH 3G3HV PUZDABS 7A11MH 3G3HV PUZDAB12A6 3MH 3G3HV PUZDAB23A3 6MH 3G3HV PUZDAB33A1 9MH 3G3HV PUZDAB47A1 3MH 3G3HV PUZDABLI Models and Application The standard models of DC Reactors are listed below 18 5 0 4 0 75 1 5 to 2 2 3 7 400 V Class
286. the Communications Option Card and the control circuit terminals Set one of the parameters H1 01 to H1 05 multi function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection to 2 Option Inverter selection to enable switching reference input using the terminal ON OFF sta tus when the Inverter is stopped llSetting Precautions To switch command inputs between the Communications Option Card and the control circuit terminals set the following parameters Set b1 01 Reference Selection to 1 Control circuit terminal analog input Set b1 02 Operation Method Selection to 1 Control circuit terminal sequence inputs Set one of the parameters H1 01 to H1 05 multi function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selec tion to 2 Option Inverter selection Terminal Status Frequency Reference and Run Command Selection Inverter Can be operated from frequency reference or control circuit terminal from analog input termi nal Communications Option Card Frequency reference and run command are enabled from communications Option Card Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands FJOG RJOG The FJOG RJOG command functions operate the Inverter using jog frequencies by using the terminal ON OFF operation When using the FJOG RJOG commands there is no need to input the run command To use this function set one of the parameters H1 01 to H1 05 multi function contact input terminal S3 to S7
287. the frequency reference After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction check that there is no oscillation or abnor mal sound from the motor Check the monitor display to ensure that U1 03 Output Current is not to high Refer to Adjustment Suggestions on page 4 13 if hunting vibration or other problems originating in the control system occur ilCheck and Recording Parameters Use verify mode i e when the VERIFY indicator on the Digital Operator is lit to check parameters that have been changed for trial operation and record them in a parameter table Any parameters that have been changed by autotuning will also be displayed in verify mode If required the copy function in parameters 03 01 and 03 02 displayed in advanced programming mode can be used to copy the changed settings from the Inverter to a recording area in the Digital Operator If changed settings are saved in the Digital Operator they can be easily copied back to the Inverter to speed up system recovery if for any reason the Inverter has to be replaced The following functions can also be used to manage parameters Recording parameters Setting access levels for parameters Setting a password E Recording parameters 02 03 If 02 03 is set to 1 after completing trial operation the settings of parameters will be saved in a separate mem ory area in the Inverter When the Inverter settings have been changed for any reason the parameters can
288. the motor s rated current 2 A 3 wire transformer is required on the power supply for 12 phase rectification Standard Inverter Specifications 8400 V Class Table 9 2 400 V Class Inverters Model Number 3G3PV 4004 4007 4015 4022 4037 4040 4055 4075 4110 4150 4185 Max applicable motor output kW Rated output capacity Rated output current A Max output voltage V 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 VAC Proportional to input voltage Max output frequency 120 Hz max Hz Output ratings Rated voltage V Rated frequency Hz 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 VAC 50 60 Hz Allowable voltage fluctua 1096 1596 tion Allowable frequency fluc tuation Power supply characteristics DC reactor Optional Measures for power supply harmonics 12 phase rec DR Not possible tification Control characteristics Model Number 3G3PV A4220 A4300 A4370 4450 4550 4750 4900 A411K 41 416 Max applicable motor output kW Rated output capacity Rated output current 60 75 91 112 150 180 216 260 Max output voltage V 3 phase 380 400 415 440 460 or 480 VAC Proportional to input voltage Max output frequency Hz 37 45 55 75 90 110 132 46 27 69 85 110 140 160 200 Output ratings 120 Hz max Max voltage V
289. the motor test report Motor Rated Voltage Setting Set E2 01 to the rated current on the motor nameplate Motor Line to Line Resistance Setting E2 05 is set automatically when performing motor line to line resistance autotuning When you cannot per form tuning consult the motor manufacturer for the line to line resistance value Calculate the resistance from the line to line resistance value in the motor test report using the following formula and then make the setting accordingly E type insulation Line to line resistance W at 75 C of test report x 0 92 W B type insulation Line to line resistance W at 75 C of test repor t x 0 92 W F type insulation Line to line resistance W at 115 C of test report x 0 87 W Setting the V f Pattern Inverter input voltage and the V f pattern can be set as the need arises B Related Parameters Nam Param m l eter Description Number LCD Display Setting Input voltage setting uh Set the Inverter input voltage This setting is used as a ref Input Voltage erence value in protection functions V f pattern selection 0 to D Select from the 14 preset V f patterns Custom user set patterns Application for settings V f Selection E1 04 to E1 10 Max output frequency FMAX 000 sop Max Frequency 1209 Output voltage V Max voltage VMAX 0 0 to VMAX 200
290. ti function analog input An input of 10 V corresponds to 100 10 V 100 10 V 0 to 10 V possible Motor second ary current Iq Mot Sec Cur rent Monitors the calculated value of the motor secondary current The motor rated secondary cur rent corresponds to 10046 10 V Motor rated secon dary current 0 to 10 V output Output fre quency after soft starter SFS output SFS Output Monitors the output frequency after the soft starter The frequency given does not include compensations The unit is set in 01 03 10 V Max frequency 0 to 10 V possible eter Number Name LCD Display PI feedback value PI Feedback Description Monitors the feedback value when PI control is used The input for the max frequency corresponds to 100 Output Signal Level During Multi Function Analog Output 10 V Max frequency 0 to 10 V possible Parameter Tables Access Level RS 422A 485 Register Software No CPU CPU ID Manufacturer s CPU software No Cannot be output OPE fault parameter OPE Detected Shows the first parameter number where an OPE fault was detected Cannot be output PI input vol ume PI Input PI feedback volume Given as maximum frequency 100 10 V Max frequency 0 to 10 V possible PI output vol ume PI Output PI control output Given a
291. tion 2 30 Option Card Models and Specifications 2 2 30 installation RRRRRRRRRRRMMMMMMMMMMMMMEEMEMMMMMMMMMMM 2 30 Digital Operator and Modes 3 1 Digit l Operator toI E RR Tenet ete ead 3 2 Digital Operator Keys ate te nette tete ted 3 3 MOG6S 2 ree Reiter teer iiid e peeled an 3 5 Inverter Modes e o ED I ati el 3 5 Switching Modes oae om See d grt ad t cb t el t atten 3 6 Drive Mode ect dm ee hited db tta dete Merit 3 7 Quick Programming Mode sesenta 3 8 Advanced Programming 3 9 VETA CEE 3 11 Autotuning Mode ah ette ee t t ntes 3 12 Trial Op ration PE 4 1 Cautions and Warnings tinea E 4 2 Trial Operation Flowchart ue eee eeeeeeeteeeeeeeeneeeeeaeeeeteaeeeeaeeeeeneeeeenaeetias 4 3 Trial Operation Procedures 4 4 Application Confirmation 4 4 Setting the Power Supply Voltage Jumper 400 V Class Inverters of 75 kW or Higher 4 4 Power ON os eect oie can metuere dde ac sum a i ad 4 4 Checking the Display Status ccccccsscssescssesescesseseseesssnsssesssteseessateseessaeseerssterearescesees 4 5 Basic Settings tees e eset Hee ettet een 4 6 Selecting the V f pattern tenete tenete tenete nenis
292. tion input unit Set in o1 03 Reference 3 Frequency reference when multi step reference 4 speed command 1 and 2 are ON for a multi function input unit Set in ol Reference 4 3 Jog fre quency refer Frequency reference when multi func ence tion inputs Jog Frequency Com command or RJOG command is ON unit Set in 01 03 Jog Reference Input voltage settin 9 Set the Inverter input voltage in units of 1 volt This set value will be the basis for the protection functions Input Voltage V F pattern selection 0 to D Select from 14 preset patterns F Custom user set patterns Applicable for setting E1 04 V F Selection to 1 10 Max output frequency FMAX Max Frequency Max voltage VMAX Output voltage V VMAX Max E1 05 VBASE Voltage GEH Base frequency Frequency FA Hz Base FMIN FA FMAX Frequency E1 09 E1 06 E1 04 Min output frequency FMIN Min Frequency LCD Display Motor rated current Motor Rated FLA Description Set the motor rated current in Amps This set value becomes the base value for motor protection torque limit and torque control It is an input data for autotuning Setting Range Factory Setting Access Level RS 422A 485 Reg ister
293. topped Otherwise the overvoltage protective or over current protective mechanism will be actuated resulting in an error ilSubmersible Motor The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors Therefore always select an Inverter by checking its rated output current When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long use a cable thick enough to connect the motor and Inverter to prevent motor torque reduction BExplosion proof Motor When an explosion proof motor is to be used it must be subject to an explosion proof test in conjunction with the Inverter This is also applicable when an existing explosion proof motor is to be operated with the Inverter Since the Inverter itself is however not explosion proof always install it in a safe place ilGearmotor The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer In particular continuous operation of an oil lubricated motor in the low speed range may result in burning If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 50 Hz consult with the manufacturer aSynchronous Motor A synchronous motor is not suitable for Inverter control If a group of synchronous motors is individually turned ON and OFF synchronism may be lost mSingle phase Motor Do not use an Inverter for a single phase motor The motor should be replaced with a 3 phase motor Power Transmission Mechanism Speed Red
294. ts attempts Automatically restarts after a fault and conducts a speed Num of Restarts search from the run frequency Auto restart operation Sets whether fault contact output is activated during selection fault restart 0 No output Fault contact is not activated 1 Output Fault contact is activated Restart Sel B Application Precautions The number of auto restarts counter is reset under the following conditions After auto restart normal operation has continued for 10 minutes After the protection operation has been performed and the error has been verified and an error reset has been input After the power supply is turned OFF and then ON again 6 44 Inverter Protection Inverter Protection Reducing Inverter Overheat Pre Alarm Warning Levels The Inverter detects the temperature of the cooling fin using the thermistor and protects the Inverter from overheating The following overheating pre alarm warnings are available Stopping the Inverter as error protection and continuing operation with the alarm OH Radiation fin overheating on the Digital Operator flashing B Related Parameters Param _ __ Description y Number LCD Display Setting Overheat pre alarm level Sets the detection temperature for the Inverter overheat detection pre alarm in C The pre alarm is detected when the cooling fin tempera ture reaches the set valu
295. tting Precautions When inputting a voltage signal to terminal A2 pin 2 of the DIP switch S1 on the control terminal board has to be turned to OFF A2 voltage input The factory setting is ON A2 current input The parameter H3 08 analog input terminal A2 signal level has to be set to 0 0 10V input Continuing Operation Continuing Operation This section explains functions for continuing or automatically restarting Inverter operation after a momentary power loss Restarting Automatically After Power Is Restored After a momentary power loss the Inverter can be restarted automatically to continue motor operation To restart the Inverter after power is recovered set L2 01 to 1 or 2 If L2 01 is set to 1 when power is recovered within the time set in L2 02 the Inverter will restart If the power loss time exceeds the time set in L2 02 an alarm UV1 main circuit undervoltage will be detected If L2 01 is set to 2 when the main power supply is recovered while the control power supply i e power sup ply to the control circuit is backed up the Inverter will restart Consequently alarm UV1 main circuit under voltage will not be detected i Related Parameters Name Factory Description Setting LCD Display Momentary power loss detec 0 Disabled main circuit undervoltage UV detection tion 1 Enabled Restarted when the power returns within the time for L2 02 When L2 02 is exceeded main circuit
296. ttings Switch to the quick programming mode the QUICK indicator on the Digital Operation should be lit and then set the following parameters Refer to Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes for Digital Operator operating procedures and to Chapter 5 Parameters and Chapter 6 Parameter Settings by Function for details on the parameters Table 4 1 Parameters that must be set Class 1 Must be set Set as required Parame ter Num Name Description ber Reference selec tion Set the frequency reference input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal analog input 2 RS 422A 485 communications 3 Option Card Setting Range Factory Setting Operation method selection Set the run command input method 0 Digital Operator 1 Control circuit terminal sequence input 2 RS 422A 485 communications 3 Option Card Stopping method selection Select stopping method when stop com mand is sent 0 Deceleration to stop 1 Coast to stop 2 DC braking stop 3 Coast to stop with timer Acceleration time 1 Set the acceleration time in seconds for the output frequency to climb from 046 to 100 0 0 to 6000 0 Deceleration time 1 Set the deceleration time in seconds for the output frequency to fall from 100 to 0 0 0 to 6000 0 Carrier fre quency selection The carrier frequency is set low if the motor cable is 50 m or longer or to reduce radio noise or leakage curr
297. ucers Belts and Chains If an oil lubricated gearbox or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism oil lubrication will be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range The power transmission mechanism will make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is operated at a speed higher than 50 Hz 10 6 Wiring Examples Wiring Examples This section provides wiring examples to connect a Braking Unit and other peripheral devices to the main circuits examples of wiring a transformer to Inverter I O and other aspects of Inverter wiring Using a Braking Resistor Unit This example shows wiring for a Braking Resistor Unit 3G3PV A2004 E to 3G3PV A2185 E 200 V class Inverters of 0 4 to 18 5 kW 3G3PV 4004 E to 3G3PV A4185 E 400 V class Inverters of 0 4 to 18 5 kW Braking Resistor overheating contacts sequence is required to tum Smal overload relay trip contacts OFF the power supply for the ther improve input mal overload relay trip contacts of power factor i at the Braking Resistor Unit P Braking Resistor Unit Short circuit MM E ree aca 3 0 0 O 3 phase power Motor on 200 to 230 V 50 60 Hz R R L1 UTI MC or 380 to 460 V s m VIT2 m wiTs 50 60 Hz Inverter M i 200 class Inverters Ground to 100 max 400 V class Inverters Ground to 10 Q max vedloads
298. ue output 2 0 to 10V 17 3 Ammeter adjustment 20 71 Multifunction analogue output 1 0 to 10 i l l l i MA Error contact output MB 250 VAC 1 A max 30 VDC 1 A max 5 Multi function contact output 250 1 30 VDC 1 Default Running M3 i signal 0 0 Multi function output 1 M4 250 VAC 1 A max 30 VDC 1 l Default Zero speed Shield iP Twisted pair wires Fig 2 2 Connection Diagram Connection Diagram E Circuit Descriptions Refer to the numbers indicated in the diagram on the previous page These circuits are hazardous and are separated from accessible surfaces by protective separation These circuits are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and reinforced insulation These circuits may be interconnected with SELV or equivalent or non SELV circuits but not both Inverter supplied by four wire system source neutral grounded These circuits are SELV Safety Extra Low Voltage circuits and are separated from all other circuits by protective separation consisting of double and reinforced insulation These circuits may only be interconnected with other SELV or equivalent circuits These circuits can be accessible or intercon nected with other accessible SELV circuits Inverter supplied by three wire system source ungrounded or corner grounded These circuits
299. ulti function commands input from the PLC and commands input from multi function contact input terminals S3 to S7 e IMPORTANT e b4 Individual Functions E Message Format In RS 422A 485 communications the master sends commands to the slave and the slave responds The mes sage format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below and the length of data packets is changed by the command function contents Slave address 1 byte Function code 1 byte Communications data Error check 2 bytes The space between messages must support the following PLC to Inverter Inverter to PLC PLC to Inverter Time Seconds ol l4 24 bits long neos 24 bits long _ jd 5 ms min setting Fig 6 40 Message Spacing Slave Address Set the Inverter address from 0 to 32 If you set 0 commands from the master will be broadcast i e the Inverter will not return responses Function Code The function code specifies commands There are three function codes as shown below Command Message Response Message Function Code Hexadecimal Function Read storage register contents Loopback test Write multiple storage registers Data Configure consecutive data by combining the storage register address test code for a loopback address and the data the register contains The data length changes depending on the command details Error Check Errors are detected during
300. ulti function common output Fig 10 4 User Parameters User Parameters Factory settings are given in the following table These setting are for a 200 V Class Inverter of 0 4 kW set to factory set control method open loop vector control Table 10 1 Parameters Factory i 200 Language selection for gia CED operor dipy fof __ ATOT ParumeteraccesTevel ATO mg T ADM Password OO ATOS Pror Reference selection eror Operation methodselection 1 E Pros Stopping method selection S bT07 Operation selection after switching to remoemode f 0 PIOS Runcommand selection programmingmodes f o D201 Zer speed Tevel DC injection braking starting frequency 05 P707 62 03 Demenan 2504 DC injection brakingtimeatsiop fon Speed search section 5 b3 01 Speed search selection P302 Speed search 001 83 05 Speed search 10 5905 05 01 control mode selection UST ona ga Pt 3 0 906 5507 PPromerafusmen 1 esos PIpiayddyum 99 5S2 Selection of PI feedback command oss demon f 9 BST Pr feedback command Toss detection wd f o BST Pr F
301. ulti function contact input terminals S3 to S7 is set to 0 termi nals S1 and S2 are used for a 3 wire sequence and the multi function input terminal that has been set functions as a forward reverse run command terminal When the Inverter is initialized for 3 wire sequence control with A1 03 multi function input 3 becomes the input terminal for the forward reverse run command Stop switch Operation switch NC contact NO contact S1 Run command operates when ON S2 Stop command stopped when ON S5 ge Forward reverse command multi function input Sequence input common Fig 6 10 3 wire Sequence Wiring Example Run command __ OFF Stop command stopped ON reverse Forward reverse command Motor speed Stop Forward Reverse Stop Forward Fig 6 11 Three wire Sequence Time Chart Use a sequence that turns ON terminal S1 for 50 ms or longer for the run command This will make the run command self holding in the Inverter INFO Stopping Methods Selecting the Stopping Method when a Stop Command is Input There are four methods of stopping the Inverter when a stop command is input Deceleration to stop Coast to stop DC braking stop Coast to stop with timer Set parameter b1 03 to select the Inverter stopping method B Related Parameters Param eter number Name LCD Display Stopping method selec tion Stopping Method
302. umber of digits below the decimal point to display Example When the max output frequency value is 200 0 set 12000 Setting Range Factory Setting Access Level RS 422A 485 Register LCD Bright ness LCD Contrast 1 light 2 3 normal 5 dark E Multi function Selections 02 Param eter Number Name LCD Display LOCAL REMOTE key enable dis able Local Remote Key Description Sets the Digital Operator Local Remote Key 0 Disabled 1 Enabled Switches between the Digital Operator and the parameter settings Setting Range Factory Setting Parameter Tables RS 422A 485 Register STOP key during control circuit terminal operation Oper STOP Key Sets the Stop Key in the run mode 0 Disabled When the run com mand is issued from and exter nal terminal the Stop Key is disabled 1 Enabled Effective even during run Parameter ini tial value User Defaults Clears or stores user initial val ues 0 Stores not set 1 Begins storing Records the set parameters as user initial values 2 All clear Clears all recorded user initial values When the set parameters are recorded as user initial values 1110 will be set in A1 03 kVA selection Inverter Model Do not set unless using a control board from an Inverter with a dif ferent capacity Frequency reference set ting method sele
303. undervoltage detection 2 Enabled while CPU is operating Restarts when power returns during control operations Does not detect main circuit undervoltage PwrL Selection Momentary power loss ride thru time Ridethrough time when momentary power loss selection 0 to 2 0 Ridethrut L2 01 is set to 1 Min baseblock BB time Set the Inverter s minimum baseblock time when the Inverter is restarted after power loss ridethrough Sets the time to approximately 0 7 times of the motor sec ondary circuit time parameter When an overcurrent or overvoltage occurs during a speed search or DC injection braking increase the set values 0 1 to 5 0 PwrL Baseblock t Voltage recovery time Set the time required to return the Inverter output voltage to normal voltage at the completion of a speed search 0 0 to Set the time required to recover from 0 V to the maximum 5 0 PwrL V f Ramp t voltage Undervoltage UV detection level Sets the main circuit undervoltage UV detection level main circuit DC voltage 150 to Usually changing this setting is not necessary 210 Insert an AC reactor in the Inverter input side to lower the 2 PUV Det Level main circuit undervoltage detection level 1 Factory settings depend on Inverter capacity The values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW 2 These values are for a 200 V Class Inverter For a 400 V Class Invert
304. ut Noise Filter at the Inverter s power supply output area Use metal tubing Electric waves can be shielded by metal so encase the Inverter with metal steel Ground the Inverter and motor Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring 7 16 Troubleshooting E If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Inverter is Run The Inverter performs internal switching so there is a certain amount of leakage current This may cause the ground fault interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply Change to a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage detection level i e a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per Unit with an operating time of 0 1 s or more or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures i e one designed for use with Invert ers It will also help to some extent to change the Inverter s Carrier Frequency Selection C6 02 to lower the carrier frequency In addition remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened If There is Mechanical Oscillation BThe machinery is making unusual sounds The following causes are possible There may be resonance between the mechanical system s characteristic frequency and the carrier frequency If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery is oscillating with a high pitched whine it may indicate that this is occurring To prevent this type of resonance adjust the carrier frequency with parameters C6
305. utomatically reset to 0 and then the display returns to 03 01 If an error is displayed press any key to cancel the error display and return to the 03 01 display Error displays and their descriptions are shown below Refer to Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operator Copy Func tion Error Display YE Verify error Settings in the Digital Operator and the Inverter do not match B Application Precautions When using the copy function check that the following settings are the same between the Inverter and the Digital Operator Inverter product and type Software number Inverter capacity and voltage Control method INFO e 85 6 86 Prohibiting Writing Parameters from the Digital Operator If you set A1 01 to 0 you can refer to and set the A1 and A2 parameter groups and refer to drive mode using the Digital Operator If you set one of the parameters H1 01 to H1 05 multi function contact input terminal S3 to S7 function selection to 1B write parameters permitted you can write parameters from the digital operator when the ter minal that has been set is ON When the set terminal is OFF writing parameters other than the frequency ref erence is prohibited You can however reference parameters Nam Param eter Description Fety Number LCD Display Setting Parameter access level Used to set the parameter access level set read 0 Monitoring only Monitoring drive mode and s
306. utput frequency to be 100 The b5 07 parameter is used to adjust PI control offset Set in increments of 0 1 taking the maximum output frequency to be 10046 6 68 Individual Functions a Set the low pass filter time parameter for the PI control output in b5 08 Enable this parameter to prevent machinery resonance when machinery adhesive abrasion is great or rigidity is poor In this case set the parameter to be greater than the resonance frequency cycle Increase this time parameter to reduce Inverter responsiveness With the Inverter by setting an independent acceleration deceleration time in parameter b5 17 you can increase or decrease the PI target value using the acceleration deceleration time The acceleration decele ration function parameter C1 that is normally used however is allocated after PI control so depending on the settings resonance with PI control and hunting in the machinery may occur If this happens reduce parameter C1 until hunting does not occur and maintain the acceleration deceleration time using b5 17 Also you can disable the set value in b5 17 from the external terminals during operation using multi func tion input set value 34 PI soft starter 20 99 19540 Id 20 99 80 99 kejap indui xoeqpeej zv Aouanbas4
307. ve optimized efficiency the search operation is used by varieting voltage Parameter b8 06 Search Operation Voltage Limiter controls the range that control the voltage using the search operation For 200 V Class Inverters set the range to 10096 200 V and for 400 V Class Inverters set the range to 100 400 V Set to 0 to disable the search operation Individual Functions a Setting Motor parameters Normally the motor parameters are set automatically using autotuning If autotuning does not complete nor mally set them manually E Related parameters Nam Param Description Number Factory LCD Display Setting Motor rated current Sets the motor rated current These set values will become the reference values for motor protection torque limits and torque control Motor Rated FLA This parameter is an input data for autotuning Motor line to line resistance 0 000 3 Sets the motor phase to phase resistance to Term Resistance 65 000 Note The factory set parameters are for a OMRON standard 4 pole motor 1 The factory settings depend on Inverter capacity the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW 2 The setting range is 10 to 200 of the Inverter rated output current the values shown are for a 200 V Class Inverter for 0 4 kW iManual Motor Parameter Setting Methods The motor parameters settings methods are given below To enter settings refer to
308. ven tion selection during running StallP Run Sel 0 Disabled Runs as set With a heavy load the motor may stall 1 Deceleration time 1 the dece leration time for the stall pre vention function is C1 02 2 Deceleration time 2 the dece leration time for the stall pre vention function is C1 04 Stall preven tion level dur ing running StallP Run Level Effective when L3 05 is 1 or 2 Set as a percentage of the Inverter rated current Usually changing this setting is not necessary The factory setting reduces the set values when the motor stalls Parameter Tables Reference Detection L4 zs E Number Display Register p bd Effective when Desired fre tion level quency ref setting agree 1 0 0 to 14 01 Frequency detection 1 or Fre 120 0 EDS quency detection 2 is set for a i multi function output Speed agree Effective when Frequency tion width speed agree 1 Desired fre nart 0 0 to quency speed agree 1 or Fre 20 0 Spd Agree quency F OUT detection 1 is Width set for a multi function output 0 Stop Operation follows the quency refer frequency reference ence Is 1 Operation continues at the fre uency set in parameter L4 14 05 q y P 0 Or 1 06 Ref Loss Sel Frequency reference loss means that the frequency reference value drops over 90 in 400 ms Frequency reference value at fre Sets the fr
309. verter uses a high carrier PWM to reduce motor vibration A parameter can be set to select low carrier PWM modulation control as well When the motor is operated with the Inverter motor vibration is almost the same as when operated with a commercial power supply Motor vibration may however become greater in the following cases Resonance with the Natural Frequency of the Mechanical System Take special care when a machine that has been operated at a parameter speed is to be operated in variable speed mode If resonance occurs install vibration proof rubber on the motor base or use the frequency jump function to skip any frequency resonating the machine Imbalanced Rotor Take special care when the motor is operated at a higher speed 50 Hz or more Noise varies with the carrier frequency At high carrier frequencies the noise is almost the same when the motor is operated with a commercial power supply Motor noise however becomes louder when the motor is operated at a speed higher than the rated speed 50 Hz 10 5 Using the Inverter for Special Motors Observe the following precautions when using a special motor imPole changing Motor The rated input current of pole changing motors differs from that of standard motors Select therefore an appropriate Inverter according to the maximum input current of the motor to be used Before changing the number of poles always make sure that the motor has s
310. with the Option Card for actual mounting instructions for option slot C E Preventing C Option Card Connectors from Rising After installing an Option Card into slot C insert an Option Clip to prevent the side with the connector from rising The Option Clip can be easily removed by holding onto the protruding portion of the Clip and pulling it out CN2 C Option Card connector Option clip pU to prevent raising of C Option Card C Option Card Fig 2 21 Mounting Option Cards 2 30 Chapter 3 Digital Operator and Modes This chapter describes Digital Operator displays and functions and provides an overview of operating modes and switching between modes 3 2 Y igital Operator This section describes the displays and functions of the Digital Operator The key names and functions of the Digital Operator are described below Digital Operator with LED Display 3G3IV PJVOP161 Drive Mode Indicators Ce a FWD Lit when there is a forward run command a REMO TE input AD REV SEQ ALARM REV Lit when there is a reverse run command input ES SEQ Lit when the run command from the control circuit terminal is enabled REF Lit when the frequency reference from control circuit terminals A1 and A2 is enabled ALARM Lit when an error or alarm has occurred PRGM Data Display a Displ monitor rameter numbers and DRIVE QUICK ADV VER
311. wn below Clamp core Inverter 3 phase 200 VAC 3 phase 400 VAC al 9 22 Options and Peripheral Devices Dimensions The dimensions of an Input Noise Filter by Schaffner for EMC Directives are given below J 0000000000000 0000000000000 0000000000000 0000000000000 20 355 336 206 M6 Inverter mounting holes x 4 Se 45 281 2455 PEN 302 265 285 Dimensions Diagram 1 Dimensions Diagram 2 STRIP TERMINAL BLOCK FOR SOLID WIRE 25mm2 iv 300 FLEX WIRE AWG 4 80 FLEX WIRE E 408 390 9 E T e a i M6 6 e 350 z 2 s 8 WIRE AWG 6 YELLOW GREEN 236 205 Eris I i M5 Inverter mounting holes x 4 i zi sul 335 265 355 265 imensions Diagram 3 cn Del l 0000000001008 s M 0100001010100 hi 1 a HDFK95 Dimensions Diagram 5 Dimensions Diagram 6 5 a OF H s nO 518 Dimensions Diagram 7 9 23 Installation of Schaffner filter
312. y resetting the alarm or switching the LOCAL REMOTE selector Doing so while the RUN signal is turned ON my result in injury Caution Be sure to confirm permissible ranges of motors and machines before opera tion because the Inverter speed can be easily changed from low to high Not doing so may result in damage to the product Caution Provide a separate holding brake when neccessary Not doing so may result in injury Caution Do not perform a signal check during operation Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product RBBB Caution Do not carelessly change settings Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product Maintenance and Inspection Precautions WARNING Do not touch the Inverter terminals while the power is being supplied Doing so may result in electrical shock WARNING Maintenance or inspection must be performed only after turning OFF the power supply confirming that the CHARGE indicator or status indicator is OFF and after waiting for the time specified on the front cover Not doing so may result in electrical shock WARNING Prohibited Maintenance inspection or parts replacement must be performed by autho rized personnel Not doing so may result in electrical shock or injury Do not attempt to disassemble or repair the product Doing so may result in electrical shock or injury Caution Care
313. y lower limit taking the 0 0 base reference to be 100 m Set the master speed reference lower limit taking 0 0 the max output frequency to be 100 m Zero speed setting If zerospeed setting is set within parameter H2 01 or H2 02 option 1 the Inverter will operate at the set minimumfrequency level programmed in parameter E1 09 One of the programmed outputs will close its contact 6 26 Improved Operating Efficiency Improved Operating Efficiency This section explains functions for improving motor operating efficiency Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Start and Low speed Operation Torque Compensation The torque compensation function detects that the motor load has increased and increases the output torque The Torque Compensation function calculates and adjusts the motor primary loss voltage according to the out put voltage V and compensates for insufficient torque at startup and during low speed operation Calculate the compensation voltage as follows Motor primary voltage loss x parameter C4 01 B Related Parameters Name o Setting Factory Access LCD Display Range Setting Level Torque compensation Set the torque compensation gain using the multiplication gain factor Normally there is no need to set this parameter Adjust the torque compensation gain in the following cir cumstances Ifthe cable is very long increase the set value Ifth

3G3PV User's Manual

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents